Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 519

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.

2014 GB 1
10.2014 EvoBus GmbH

Not to be reprinted, reproduced or translated in any form without prior permission.

Address for orders:


EvoBus GmbH
Service Documentation
D-89231 Neu-Ulm

Printed in Germany

Order no.: A 632 584 04 19


Introduction Please consult the “Safety” section be- Environmental protection
fore starting up the bus for the first
The user information supplied with The declared policy of EvoBus GmbH
time, and familiarise yourself with the
each bus is intended for use only is one of integrated environmental pro-
contents of these Operating Instructions
by persons who are qualified to tection. This policy starts at the root
before setting off.
operate the bus. The user causes and encompasses in its manage-
information is split into the Items of optional equipment are also de- ment decisions all the consequences for
following parts: scribed, if their operation needs explana- the environment which could arise from
tion. The bus delivered to you has been production processes or the products
The Driver's Operating Instructions customised in accordance with your or-
are intended to answer all import- themselves.
der, therefore some descriptions and
ant questions concerning operation The objectives are for the natural re-
diagrams may differ from the equipment
of the bus in a concise and clearly sources which form the basis of our ex-
on your bus.
understandable manner. istence on this planet to be used spar-
The Driver's Operating Instructions, the ingly and in a manner which takes the
More detailed and complete inform- Operating Instructions and the Mainten-
ation, as well as further information requirements of both nature and human-
ance Record are important documents ity into account.
relevant to safety, can be found in and must always be carried in the bus.
the Operating Instructions. Operate your vehicle in an environment-
Our buses are the subject of ongoing ally responsible manner and you will help
The Maintenance Record serves as development. You are therefore asked
a guide to the technical care of the to protect the environment. Fuel con-
to appreciate that we reserve the right sumption and wear in the drive train (en-
bus. It contains all the information to make modifications to the design,
on maintenance intervals and main- gine, clutch, transmission, axles, brakes,
equipment and technical features. For tyres) are extremely dependent on your
tenance tasks as well as pages for these reasons, no claims can be made
confirming that the maintenance driving style.
based upon the contents of this user
work has been carried out. information. We hope you enjoy driving your bus.
EvoBus GmbH
Mercedes-Benz Omnibusse
Table of contents

Additional maintenance tasks AdBlue® service product . . . . . . . . 37


Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dependent on bus use . . . . . . . . . . 16 Filling with AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
General bus care and mainten- Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . 40
ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Diesel particulate filter regenera-
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3 Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
General safety information . . . . .... 4
Starting regeneration of the diesel
Storage space for hand luggage . .... 9 particulate filter manually . . . . . . . . 44
Driver's rest area safety precau- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operating/malfunction displays:
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 9 Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 fuel system/exhaust gas cleaning
Windscreen wiper system safety Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 9 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Function description: accident data
Safety precautions for the air- Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 recorder (ADR) (option) . . . . . . . . . . 47
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . 27 Brake system safety precautions . . . 49
Operation of auxiliary heating . . . . . 10 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . 49
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Brakes with anti-locking protec-
Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Preparation for the journey - daily
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Applying the parking brake . . . . . . . 51
Preparation for the journey - weekly Ball hitch trailer coupling and Releasing the parking brake . . . . . . 52
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable) Emergency braking in the event of
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 failure of both brake circuits . . . . . . 52
Preparation for the journey - monthly
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Connecting the power supply . . . . . 33 EBS brake system (system descrip-
Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . . . 33 tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Refuelling (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . . 54
BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB I


Table of contents

Electronic Stability Program Care/cleaning of fabric covers . . . . 78 Location of the first-aid kits . . . . . 107
(ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Care/cleaning of micro-fibre Tow bar location (option) . . . . . . . 108
Operating/malfunction displays: covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Location of spare mirror (op-
brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Care/cleaning of leather covers . . . . 81 tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Activating the slip increase func- Emergency hammer (option) . . . . . 108
tion of ASR (acceleration skid Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 On-board kitchenette refrigerator
Operating/malfunction displays: Driver's area overview . . . . . . . . . . . 88 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
ABS/ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Switches on the left section of the Tour guide refrigerator control
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
(function description) . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Switches on the right section of the Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . 116
Deactivating the Electronic Stability instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . 117
Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15
Operating/malfunction displays: Tachograph (installation posi- RHD (example of 2-axle bus) . . . . . 118
brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Design and function description:
Operating 230/400 V systems DTCO tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . 119
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Operating and malfunction displays:
Fitting the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . 71 Destination display safety precau- fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . 119
Swivelling the skibox (option) . . . . . 73 tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Additional operating instructions for Destination display control pan-
the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Driver's area controls . . . . . . . . . 121
Note on maintenance work . . . . . . . 74 Door pushbutton in the driver's Rotary light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Steering column switch for light
Care/cleaning of light-alloy Scope of tools and emergency and wiper functions . . . . . . . . . . . 124
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Steering column switch for retarder
Care and cleaning of covers, Location of the fire extinguish- and cruise control (overview) . . . . . 124
upholstery and ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . 77 ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Adjustable steering column . . . . . . 129

II TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Table of contents

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Important information on the Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans-
Parking brake and emergency steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 mission shift system failsafe mode
release device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Turning the steering wheel when (option) (activation of failsafe mode
Basic settings menu on display the bus is stationary . . . . . . . . . . . 147 and R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Activating the attendant call Creep mode pushbutton . . . . . . . . 155
Brightness setting of the display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Display control pushbutton . . . . . . 156
screen and instrument lighting . . . . 132 Driver's area lighting switch . . . . . 156
Display screen in the instrument ADR pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Switch descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 149 Reading lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . 157
Calling up and interpreting the fuel Master safety switch (emergency-off Passenger-compartment lighting
consumption indicator (option) . . . 140 switch) (national variant) . . . . . . . . 152 switch positions I+II . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air suspension safety precau- Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Night lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . 158
tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Windscreen roller sunblind pushbut- Roof hatch pushbutton - air in/air
Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . 142 ton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 out (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Pushbutton for co-driver's roller Attendant call system switch . . . . . 159
Activating/deactivating axle load sunblind (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
“School bus operation” pushbutton
transfer for trailing axle (3-axle Axle load transfer switch (3-axle (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Audible reverse warning feature
Activating/deactivating the bus Diesel particulate filter (DPF) switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
stop brake (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 regeneration start/inhibit . . . . . . . 154
Driver's power window pushbut-
Activating/deactivating the drive-off Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
lock (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pushbutton for raising/lowering the
Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans- bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
mission shift system failsafe mode
Normal-level pushbutton . . . . . . . . 160
(option) (2/4 and N) . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Passenger stop request system
enabling switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB III


Table of contents

Switch for the driver's window Hazard warning lamps switch . . . . 166 Fitting a seat squab . . . . . . . . . . . 179
heating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . 161 Door I pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . 180
Windscreen heating switch Door II pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Passenger seat service set . . . . . . 182
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Bus stop brake emergency release
Horn changeover switch (op- switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 ADR button (accident data record- Transmission shift systems . . . . 185
Central locking pushbutton for the er) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Transmission shift system safety
left-side luggage compartment . . . . 162 precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Central locking pushbutton for Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift
the right-side luggage compart- Driver’s seat/passenger aid) transmission shift system . . . . 187
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Transmission shift system GO
Kitchenette enabling switch Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 250-8 (system description) . . . . . . 187
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Grammer driver’s seat control GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selector
Lavatory enabling switch (op- elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 lever) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat Operation of the GO 250-8
Switch for electrical circuits > 100 controls (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 PowerShift transmission shift
V (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Operation of the jump seat . . . . . . 176 system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Seat microphone switch . . . . . . . . 164 Adjusting a passenger seat . . . . . . 177 Operation of the GO 250-8
Pushbutton for hanging up the Using the driver's seat belt . . . . . . 178 PowerShift failsafe mode (op-
intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Operating the jump-seat seat tion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Selection pushbutton for intercom belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
in the driver's rest area/kitchenette Passenger-compartment-seating
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Switch for deactivating pedal- Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Removing a seat squab . . . . . . . . . 179
activated continuous braking . . . . . 165 Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . 209
Bus stop brake pushbutton Automatic speed limiter (function
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

IV TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Table of contents

Variable speed limiter (Tem- Activating the reheat function . . . . 228 Unlocking the door circuit at the
poset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Activating the auxiliary heating front right door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Activating the variable speed limiter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Unlocking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
(Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Programming auxiliary heating Unlocking the door circuit using the
Combined drive/brake cruise switch-on times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 radio remote control (option) . . . . . 246
control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Activating a programmed auxiliary Unlocking the luggage compartment
Activating combined drive/brake heating switch-on time . . . . . . . . . 233 flaps using the pushbuttons in the
cruise control (option) . . . . . . . . . . 214 Deactivating an activated switch-on driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Unlocking the luggage compartment
Programming the auxiliary heating flaps using the remote control
Heating/ventilation/air-condi- switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
tioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Switches/controllers in the driver's Locking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Operating instructions for the air- rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Locking door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Locking using the radio remote
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
(HVAC) control panel . . . . . . . . . . 220 Opening/locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Central locking system (option)
Manually regulating the blower Door pushbutton in the driver's (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . 251
speed in the driver's area . . . . . . . 223 area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Operating/malfunction displays:
Preselecting the passenger- Anti-entrapment protection (revers- central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
compartment temperature . . . . . . . 224 ing) as the doors are closed . . . . . 242 Emergency operation of the doors
Manually regulating the blower Protection against entrapment in (depressurising the doors using the
speed in the passenger compart- the door opening direction . . . . . . 242 emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Locking the exterior emergency Emergency unlocking of the luggage
Activating the air-conditioning . . . . 227 valve at door 2 (option) . . . . . . . . . 243 compartment flaps in the event of a
Activating air-recirculation mode Operating/malfunction displays: compressed-air supply failure . . . . 257
in the driver's area/passenger doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB V


Table of contents

Opening/closing the service cover Switching on the sausage heat- Draining the 2-carafe filter sys-
under the driver's window . . . . . . . 258 er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Opening/closing the roof hatches Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . 282 Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . 297
manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Descaling the sausage heater . . . . 282 Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Emergency exit through emergency Switching on the 40-cup coffee Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
operation of the electric roof machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Restoring boiler operation following
hatches (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Brewing coffee in winter . . . . . . . . 287 a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Cleaning the 40-cup coffee Using the sausage heater again
machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
On-board kitchenette . . . . . . . . . 263
Switching on the 2-carafe filter Using the 40-cup coffee machine
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 266 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 again after a malfunction . . . . . . . 302
Instructions for operating a Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 Using the 2-carafe filter system
microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 again after a malfunction . . . . . . . 303
Use for the intended purpose . . . . 269 Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 269 of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . 305
First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . 270 Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40
Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . 271 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Filling the fresh water tank inside Manual operation of the 2-carafe On-board kitchenette (Eltes-
the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 an) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Filling the fresh water tank outside Descaling the coffee machine . . . . 292 General information . . . . . . . . . . . 308
the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Use for the intended purpose . . . . 309
Checking and cleaning the fresh Draining the fresh water tank . . . . 293 Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 309
water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . 294 Switching on the on-board kit-
Drawing water from the water Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 chenette (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Drawing water from the tap
Draining the 40-cup coffee
Switching on the boiler . . . . . . . . . 276 machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 (Eltesan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Descaling the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . 277

VI TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Table of contents

Filling with fresh water (Eltes- Switching on the coffee ma- Using the boiler (option) again after
an) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 chine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Troubleshooting (Eltesan) . . . . . . . 314 Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Winter operation (Eltesan) . . . . . . . 315 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . 346
Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups
of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
On-board kitchenette (integrated Descaling the coffee machine . . . . 331 Lavatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
in the lavatory cabin) . . . . . . . . . 317 Dispensing cups of hot water Enabling the lavatory . . . . . . . . . . 350
Safety precautions/general (alternative to coffee machine) . . . 332 Switchover between water (WC)
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Boiler (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 and chemical (CC) operation
Use for the intended purpose . . . . 320 Setting the thermostat of the water (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . 320 heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Flushing the WC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
First use of the kitchenette . . . . . . 320 Descaling the water heater Drawing water at the handwash
Switching on the kitchenette . . . . . 321 boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Filling the fresh water tank inside Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Filling the soap dispenser . . . . . . . 354
the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Draining the fresh water tank . . . . 337 Adding paper hand towels . . . . . . . 355
Filling the fresh water tank outside Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . 337 Adding toilet paper . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Opening the basin undercabin-
Checking and cleaning the fresh Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . 339 et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Changing waste bags . . . . . . . . . . 356
Drawing water from the water Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Filling the fresh water storage
tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Using the sausage heater again
Switching on the sausage heat- after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Emptying the fresh water storage
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Using the coffee machine again
Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . 328 after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Emptying the solid waste contain-
Descaling the sausage heater . . . . 328 er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB VII


Table of contents

Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Pneumatic system test ports under
Checking the residual current Tyre condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
device for the 230 V socket Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Pneumatic test ports behind door
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Invisible tyre damage . . . . . . . . . . 392 2......................... 414
Greasing the impeller of the CC Tyre load capacity, top speed of Other pneumatic test ports . . . . . . 416
pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 tyres and types of tyres . . . . . . . . 393 Charging the compressed-air
Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 system of another bus (option) . . . 417
Tyre pressures table 295/80 R Operating the bus stop brake/
Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 drive-off lock emergency release
22.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Overview of the operating, function switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
On-screen tyre pressure monit-
and malfunction display screen . . . 368 Operating/malfunction displays:
or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Engine oil level display . . . . . . . . . 376 steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Safety measures to be taken in
Oil level alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 the event of a flat tyre or a wheel Bleeding the fuel system using the
Oil level information . . . . . . . . . . . 379 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 electric fuel pump (option) . . . . . . 420
Checking the engine oil level with Fitting snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Replacing the water heater fuel
the dipstick (option) . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Removing the spare wheel from the filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Safety precautions for work carried spare wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Electrical system safety precau-
out in the engine compartment . . . 383 Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . 399 tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Removing the drive belts (OM Removing the wheel nut cover or General safety precautions for
470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 wheel trim (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fitting the drive belts (OM Removing the wheels . . . . . . . . . . 401 Safety precautions for handling
470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fitting the spare wheel . . . . . . . . . 406
Checking the coolant level of the Measures required for the pre-
Fitting the wheel nut cover or wheel
engine and heating system . . . . . . 389 vention of damage to buses or
trim (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Tyres - operating safety and components during electric welding
Inflating tyres using the tyre inflator work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
roadworthiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
connection (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

VIII TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Table of contents

Electrical system (illustration shows Fuse assignment for the power Emergency operation of the doors
15 RHD as an example) . . . . . . . . 426 distribution board (PDB), Tourismo (depressurising the doors using the
Battery isolating switch (with RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
switch-off authorisation LED) . . . . . 428 Fuse assignment for the ceiling Emergency unlocking of the luggage
Driver's area interior switch switch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . 460 compartment flaps in the event of a
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Fuse assignment for roof-moun- compressed-air supply failure . . . . 479
Main switch panel (under the ted heating, ventilation and air- Removing the exterior mirror, fitting
driver’s area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 conditioning system (Webasto) . . . 462 the emergency mirror (option) . . . . 481
Auxiliary switch panel . . . . . . . . . . 434 Fuse assignment for roof-moun- Emergency operation for heating in
PDB fuse switch panel . . . . . . . . . 436 ted heating, ventilation and air- driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Ceiling switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . 438 conditioning system (Konvekta) . . . 464 Emergency operation of the
Electrical connection for the Handling fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 passenger-compartment heat-
roof-mounted system (heating, Disconnecting vehicle batteries . . . 466 ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
ventilation, air-conditioning) . . . . . . 440 Recharging vehicle batteries . . . . . 468 Maintenance tasks for the air-con-
Battery compartment . . . . . . . . . . 442 Notes on jump-starting . . . . . . . . . 468 ditioning system in the bus (filter
Jump-start procedure . . . . . . . . . . 469 maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Notes on fuse assignments . . . . . . 443
Activation of on-board dia- Scopes of maintenance for the air-
Fuse assignment for the driver's
gnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . 486
area interior switch panel, Tourismo
RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Interpreting the on-board dia- Cleaning the heating system water
gnostics screen display . . . . . . . . . 471 filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Fuse assignment for the main
switch panel (under the driver's Clearing the fault memory of the Bleeding the coolant circuit for the
area), Tourismo RHD . . . . . . . . . . . 446 selected system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Fuse assignment for the auxiliary Ending on-board diagnostics . . . . . 472
switch panel, Tourismo RHD . . . . . 448 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Fuse assignment for auxiliary switch Adjusting the headlamps for driving Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
panel with PDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 on the left or right (only in buses
Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
with bi-xenon headlamps) . . . . . . . 477

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB IX


Table of contents

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

X TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Vehicle identification

No. Designation Value

6 Permissible axle
load for front axle
7 Permissible axle
load for driven
axle
8 Permissible axle
load for trailing
axle
M00_00-0316-01 M00_00-0315-01

The vehicle identification plate bearing Decoding a vehicle identification


No. Designation Value
the vehicle identification number (VIN) number (VIN) using NMB 632035 1
and information regarding permissible 3 (xxxxxx) as an example:
1 Vehicle designa-
weights is located in the front doorway tion NMB World-wide manufac-
turer code
2 Headlamp basic
Note: setting NMB MB Turkey
It is very important to identify the vehicle
exactly so that the correct “vehicle data”
3 Headlamp basic WEB EvoBus Germany
can be assigned. You will also need the setting
VIN when ordering replacement parts and
VF9 EvoBus France
4 Vehicle Identi-
making technical enquiries. fication Number VS9 EvoBus Spain
(VIN)
5 Permissible gross
vehicle weight

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 1


Vehicle identification

63203x Vehicle model designa-


tion number

63203x Tourismo RHD


5 Vehicle length

5 12.96 m
6 12.14 m
7 13.99 m
1 Steering M00_00-0082-01

The vehicle identification number (ar-


1 Left-hand-drive rowed) is also marked on the skeleton
vehicle in the forward section of the bus. It can
be accessed via the spare wheel cover
2 Right-hand-drive (to open, use the lever in the entrance of
vehicle the front right door).
3 Body type

3 Complete bus

2 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Safety
Table of contents

General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4


Storage space for hand luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Driver's rest area safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Windscreen wiper system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operation of auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 3


Safety
General safety information

General safety information Meaning of symbols: Notes on vehicle safety


The use of symbols and their We recommend that you:
meanings Note:
Use only genuine parts that are
Safety precautions and other important Notes about important additional informa-
OMNIplus quality tested and con-
tion
information are highlighted by symbols. version parts and accessories that
In addition to the instructions provided have been expressly approved by
herein, all generally applicable safety and EvoBus for the bus model concerned
Caution:
accident prevention regulations must in order to rule out the possibility
Warning notes about damage that may of jeopardising road safety and
also be observed, e.g. in Germany, the
occur in the event of non-compliance invalidating the warranty and general
rules and regulations of the institutions
for statutory accident insurance and pre- operating permit. These parts have
vention. been specially tested for their safety,
Danger.
Instructions and information printed on reliability and suitability.
the packaging for components, tools and Warning notes for risks to persons
You can obtain further information from
service products must also be observed. any OMNIplus Service Partner.
Where information and instructions are
Environmental protection Operating safety
to be observed, it is assumed that the
user information is intended for persons Notes about environmental protection Important information:
who are suitably qualified to carry out measures
Any work or modifications that have
the tasks by nature of their education, been carried out incorrectly on the
training and experience. Reference to more detailed and addi-
tional user information bus may result in malfunctions.
These persons should, at the same time, Tampering with electronic compon-
be able to identify risks that may arise in ents and their software may cause
the undertaking of their tasks and take malfunctions. As electronic compon-
the necessary measures to avoid them. ents are networked, these malfunc-

4 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Safety
General safety information

tions may also cause other, indir- At the time of purchase or installa- Registration as class 3: tourist coach
ectly related systems to malfunction. tion, it must be checked that these
Exclusively for the carriage of seated
These malfunctions may jeopardise materials and components have been
passengers.
the operating safety and reliability of certified accordingly. The use of ma-
the bus. terials or components that have not Important information for buses clas-
Retrofitted electrical or electronic been granted the relevant certificate sified in accordance with EU Directive
devices must possess type-approval may result in the operating permit 2001/85 into class 2 and 3 (mixed ap-
complying with Directive 95/54/EC being invalidated. proval):
or ECE Directive 10/02. We recommend that you have work
Materials that are fitted in the bus or modifications carried out by an Note:
during the course of installation, con- OMNIplus Service Partner. The operator of the bus is responsible for
version or modification work and ensuring that the bus is restored to the
EU Directive 2001/85
that are subject to mandatory fire- condition consistent with the permissible
testing requirements must satis- Registration as class 1: city bus type of operation of the class concerned.
fy the requirements of EU Directive Vehicles constructed with areas for
95/28/EC. standing passengers, to allow fre-
Note:
Materials and components of seats quent passenger movement.
and seat fixtures that are also fitted For instance, this means that, in the case
Registration as class 2: interurban bus of a bus being used in accordance with
in the bus during the course of in-
Principally for the carriage of seated class 2, it is necessary to ensure that the
stallation, conversion or modification
bus is operated with seating having no
work must satisfy the requirements passengers. Designed to allow the
aisle-side sideways adjustment.
of the following directives: 76/ carriage of standing passengers in
115/EEC as amended by 96/38/EC, the gangway and/or in an area which
74/408/EEC as amended by 96/ does not exceed the space provided
37/EC, 77/541/EEC as amended by for two double seats.
96/36/EC.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 5


Safety
General safety information

Navigation and global positioning shielded equipment (cardiac pacemakers


system Danger. included) to malfunction.
If your bus is equipped with a navigation Please devote your attention primarily
system, please observe the following to road and traffic conditions. Do not Note:
instructions and information: operate the display unit, radio or mobile If a mobile phone, radio system or fax
communications equipment unless the machine is retrofitted in the bus in a
traffic situation permits this to be done manner that does not comply with EvoBus
Danger. safely. Please bear in mind that your bus installation specifications, the operating
Please devote your attention primarily to will cover a distance of 14 metres every permit for the bus could be invalidated
road and traffic conditions. Do not at- second at a speed of only 50 km/h. (EU Directive 95/54/EC).
tempt to operate the navigation and pos-
itioning system unless the bus is station-
ary. Please bear in mind that your bus Danger. Note:
will cover a distance of 14 metres every
Please observe local legal requirements Older peripherals (e.g. ticket-printing ma-
second at a speed of only 50 km/h. The
governing the use of mobile phones or chines, ticket-cancelling machines, destin-
navigation system is unable to take into
on-board telephones/intercoms in force in ation displays, etc.) that are still used in
consideration the maximum load-bear-
the country of vehicle operation. new buses must comply with the technic-
ing capacity of bridges or the required
headroom clearance for underpasses. al requirements of EC Directive 72/245
The driver is responsible for checking the Operation of mobile phones and EEC.
load-bearing capacity of bridges and head- two-way radios without an exterior
room clearances encountered en route. aerial
We advise against making or receiving Danger.
Operation of radio and mobile telephone calls in buses not equipped Please observe local legal requirements
communications equipment with an exterior aerial as the operation governing the use of mobile phones or
(e.g. telephone, two-way radio, fax ma- of radio transmitters, which include but on-board telephones/intercoms in force in
chine, etc.) are not limited to radio telephones (mo- the country of vehicle operation.
bile phones), may cause inadequately

6 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Safety
General safety information

Stickers These items of technical information The data are exclusively technical in
generally document the state of a nature and can be used for
There are various warning stickers af-
component, module, system or the
fixed to your bus. These are intended to assisting the detection and rectifica-
environment. These could be, for
make you and others aware of various tion of faults and defects,
example:
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any analysing vehicle functions, e.g. after
warning stickers unless it is expressly Operating states of system compon- an accident,
stated on the sticker that you may do ents. These include fill levels, etc. optimising vehicle functions.
so. Status messages relating to the
vehicle and its individual compon- Motion profiles on driven routes cannot
ents. These include, for example, be generated from these data. Whenever
Danger.
wheel rotation speed/driving speed, you arrange for a particular vehicle ser-
If you remove warning stickers, this could vice, these items of technical information
result in you or other persons failing to
deceleration, lateral acceleration, ac-
celerator pedal position. can be read out from the event and fault
recognise dangers. You or others could data memories.
be injured as a result. Malfunctions and defects in import-
ant system components. These in- Services include, for example:
Data stored in the vehicle clude lights, brakes, etc. Repairs
A host of electronic components in your Responses and operating states of Customer service processes
vehicle contain a data memory. These the vehicle in specific driving situ- Warranty claims
data memories store information, ations. These include, for example,
Quality assurance
temporarily or permanently, relating to triggering of an airbag, intervention
of stability control systems. This read-out is performed by employ-
Vehicle condition
Environmental states. These include ees in the ServiceNetwork (including
Events manufacturers) with the use of special
outside temperature, etc.
Faults diagnostic testers. They enable you to
obtain further information as and when
necessary. After faults have been recti-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 7


Safety
General safety information

fied, the information in the fault memory Washing the outside of the bus in Remove any attachment parts that may
is cleared or continuously overwritten. an automatic vehicle wash be fitted (e.g. satellite receiver on the
During use of the vehicle, certain situ- roof) before the bus is washed.
ations could arise in which these tech-
nical data could become personal data
when combined with other information -
where applicable under the direction of
an independent expert.
Examples include:
Accident logs
Damage to the vehicle
Witness statements
Other auxiliary functions that are M88_00-0004-01
contractually agreed with the customer Before the bus is washed, make sure
similarly permit the outgoing that the roof hatches, driver's window
communication of vehicle data from the and the doors are closed. Set the heat-
vehicle. Example: ing/ventilation/air-conditioning system
FleetBoard telematics system to air-recirculation mode (Smog button).
Before the bus is washed, fold both in-
tegral mirrors inwards towards the wind-
screen by means of the hinge pin on the
mirror arm.
After the washing process, fold the integ-
ral mirrors outwards again.

8 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Safety
Storage space for hand luggage

Storage space for hand luggage Driver's rest area safety precau- Windscreen wiper system safety
tions precautions
The driver's rest area must only be used
by the bus driver (second driver).
The on-board telephone may only be
used by the driver in accordance with
legal requirements. Observe the legal
requirements of the country concerned.

T68_00-0018-31

The storage spaces above the passenger M54.00-2004-71

seats are suitable for light hand luggage


items only.
Danger.
Danger. RISK OF INJURY. The battery isolating
Occupants may be injured if the bus is switch (01S01) must always be switched
braked sharply, changes direction sud- off before any work is carried out on the
denly or is involved in an accident due windscreen wiper system (wiper blade
to objects being thrown around the bus. cleaning, replacement of wiper blades or
Heavy or hard objects should therefore wiper motor etc.).
not be carried inside the bus without be-
ing secured.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 9


Safety
Safety precautions for the air-conditioning system

Safety precautions for the air- The operator must maintain a logbook Operation of auxiliary heating
conditioning system auditing the consumption of refrigerant
Air-conditioning systems that are op- and refrigerator oils.
erated with refrigerant R 134 a are la- Danger.
belled with appropriate stickers and/or Danger.
plates on the compressor. Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of
In automatically controlled air-conditioning fires and burns due to the high exhaust
Never mix R 134 a refrigerant and the systems, the ventilation blowers of con- temperatures and the hot exhaust pipe
corresponding Triton SE 55 refrigerator denser or evaporator units may start up for the auxiliary heating. For this reason,
oil with other products. at any time. Therefore, always switch do not stop or park the bus over ignitable
the ignition starter switch to OFF be- materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary
In accordance with current good engin- fore any cleaning work is carried out.
eering practices, it is prohibited to allow heating is in operation, has recently been
Do not reach into the fan blades or fan in operation or has been operated by the
refrigerant to escape into the environ- rollers. Avoid any contact with refriger- immediate heating button/preset clock.
ment when operating, servicing or de- ant as there is a risk of frostbite. Treat
commissioning air-conditioning systems. affected skin areas as for frostbite, and
Refrigerants and refrigerator oils must seek medical attention immediately. Carry
out maintenance and repair tasks with the Danger.
be disposed of or recycled separately by
engine switched off whenever possible. Risk of poisoning and suffocation. The
type and nature. Keep a safe distance from moving parts auxiliary heating must not be used in en-
Only persons having the relevant and (e.g. belt drive) when the engine is run- closed spaces such as garages or work-
necessary specialist knowledge, technic- ning. shops due to the risk of poisoning and
al equipment and official approval (by suffocation. It must also not be used in
health and safety inspectorate, local au- timer or preselection mode.
thority, TÜV or equivalent) are permitted
to carry out maintenance work on air-
conditioning systems and take back refri-
gerants and oils.

10 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Safety
Operation of auxiliary heating

Danger.
Risk of explosion. The auxiliary heating
must be switched off at filling stations
and fuel dispensing systems due to the
risk of explosion.

Danger.
Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must
remain switched off in places where ignit-
able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g.
in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel, coal,
sawdust and grain stores or similar).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 11


12 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
General
Table of contents

Preparation for the journey - daily tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14


Preparation for the journey - weekly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Preparation for the journey - monthly tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Additional maintenance tasks dependent on bus use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
General bus care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 13


General
Preparation for the journey - daily tasks

Preparation for the journey - daily Check the position of the rear-view
tasks Note: mirrors, clean the mirrors, test the
Check the windscreen washer fluid Under certain weather and operating con- mirror heating.
level and test the windscreen washer ditions, moisture may form on the inside Check tyre pressures and tyre con-
system and windscreen wipers. of the headlamps and other lights when dition (including the spare wheel).
the bus is stationary. This does not in-
Check the fuel level for the engine Check that the wheel nuts are firmly
dicate a fault or defect. The ventilation
and water heater openings in the headlamps allow this
seated.
moisture to evaporate soon after the bus
has pulled away.
Danger.
Switch off the engine and auxiliary heat- Check the luggage compartment
ing before refuelling. flaps for secure locking

Check the AdBlue additive level in Check the emergency exits


the BlueTec exhaust gas cleaning Insert the driver card.
system
Check the electrical system, paying Note:
particular attention to the headlamps, The indicator lamp in the tachograph
turn signals, tail lamps, brake lamps lights up if no driver card is inserted. M40_00-0115-71
and licence plate lamps.
Check that the emergency equip- Check wheel hubs (1) on all wheels
ment is accessible and complete, e.g. for leaks inside and out (visual
first-aid kit, fire extinguisher, warning check).
triangle, emergency hammer for side
windows, jack.

14 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


General
Preparation for the journey - weekly tasks

Preparation for the journey - weekly Carry out a visual check to ensure
Note: tasks there are no leaks in the engine,
If the wheel hubs are leaking, there may Check the coolant level in the cool- transmission, driven axle, steering
be grease or oil residue on the tyres ing system and top it up if necessary. or the cooling and heating systems.
themselves or deposits on the parking Check the corrosion inhibitor/anti- Drain the fuel prefilter in the engine
area on which the bus is standing. Con- freeze concentration each time the compartment.
sult an OMNIplus Service Partner in the
coolant has been topped up and cor-
event of a leak.
rect if necessary. Note:
Refer to the “Practical advice” section.
Note:
See the Specifications for Service Check the acid level in the starter
Products batteries (only on buses with lead-
acid batteries).
Check the oil level in the hydraulic
steering system and top it up if ne-
Danger.
cessary.
Observe the safety precautions in the
“Practical advice” section.
Caution:
If the oil level is low, have the steering Check the seat belts (belt arrester).
system checked at an authorised special- Check the belt straps for damage
ist workshop. (visual check).
Check the belt tension of all belt
drives.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 15


General
Preparation for the journey - monthly tasks

Preparation for the journey - Additional maintenance tasks General bus care and maintenance
monthly tasks dependent on bus use Carry out the work specified in the
Check the residual current device The bus operator must plan further Maintenance Record
for the 230 V socket (option) in the maintenance tasks for the heating/
lavatory. ventilation/air-conditioning system Caution:
(driver’s area and passenger com-
Regular maintenance of the chassis and
partment) in addition to those indic-
drive train is essential to maintaining
ated in the Maintenance Record. the operating safety and roadworthiness
of the bus. The time intervals and the
Note: scope of work required are specified in
the Maintenance Record supplied with the
Refer to the “Practical advice” section.
bus.

Caution:
It is strongly recommended that the spe-
cified maintenance intervals be observed.

16 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


General
Care and cleaning

Care and cleaning


Note: You will find further instructions for
Warranty claims based on our terms and and notes on cleaning and caring for
conditions of sale and delivery may be your bus in the “Operation” section
rejected if the periodic maintenance tasks
have not been carried out at the specified
distances (odometer readings) or times. Note:
Have confirmation of the completed work The following stipulations for exterior
recorded in the Maintenance Record by cleaning must be observed: Use a suffi-
an OMNIplus Service Partner. cient amount of fresh water. Dry rubbing
between washing brushes and the vehicle
must not be allowed to occur. Preclean
heavily soiled components. The polishing
of lighting equipment with commercially
available care products is not permitted.
The use of polyethylene fibres as a brush
material is not permitted. Recommenda-
tion: Use brushes made with textile fibres
or foam.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 17


18 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
Operation
Table of contents

Running-in guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Loading a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Ball hitch trailer coupling and open-jaw trailer coupling (detachable) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Trailer coupling maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Refuelling (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
AdBlue® service product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Filling with AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 19


Operation
Table of contents

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40


Diesel particulate filter regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Starting regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system/exhaust gas cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Function description: accident data recorder (ADR) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Brake system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Braking and stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Brakes with anti-locking protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Applying the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Releasing the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Emergency braking in the event of failure of both brake circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
EBS brake system (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Acceleration skid control (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

20 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Table of contents

Operating/malfunction displays: brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56


Activating the slip increase function of ASR (acceleration skid control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Operating/malfunction displays: ABS/ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Deactivating the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operating 230/400 V systems (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fitting the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Swivelling the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Additional operating instructions for the skibox (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Note on maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Care and cleaning of covers, upholstery and ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 21


Operation
Table of contents

Care/cleaning of fabric covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78


Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Care/cleaning of leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

22 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Running-in guideline

Running-in guideline economic rpm in each gear. During the Starting the engine
Running in the chassis and drive train running-in period, do not drive the bus for The parking brake must be applied.
long distances at the same road speed =
Transmission in neutral.
same rpm. Varying engine speeds and
Note: therefore varying loads demanded of the
The way in which the chassis and drive entire drive train are favourable to the Note:
train of the new bus are treated during running-in of the bus. Do not depress the clutch pedal while
the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km) is crit- starting the engine.
ical to the bus' future performance and
service life.
Note:
At outside temperatures of below -20 °C,
Note:
preheat the engine with the water heater
The load to which the bus is subjected (see heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
during this period should be increased control panel).
only gradually. The maintenance and lub-
rication tasks specified in the Mainten-
ance Record should be carried out con-
Note:
scientiously.
The bus is equipped with an immobiliser.
The engine cannot be started without one
of the authorised keys.
Caution:
Do not place the engine under full load
during the running-in period. Up to
1,200 miles (2,000 km): run in with
care. Drive at no higher than 3/4 of the
maximum rpm in each gear. After 1,200
miles (2,000 km): slowly increase to the

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 23


Operation
Starting the engine

Note: Note:
After a maximum of 3 starting attempts, For emergencies, we recommend that you
wait (about 15 minutes) before trying always carry a spare key to which you
again. have access at all times.

Release the key when the engine


starts.

If this icon appears on the screen in Caution:


conjunction with a yellow warning It is not permitted to increase the engine
M54_00-0083-01
level malfunction and a warning sig- speed while the “Oil pressure too low”
Turn the ignition switch to position nal sounds, you have made 5 starting symbol is shown on the display screen.
2, the bus carries out an indicator attempts using an invalid key. The If the “Oil pressure too low” symbol ap-
lamp check (all indicator lamps must pears for more than 10 seconds, turn off
immobiliser has been activated.
light up briefly), then turn the igni- the engine immediately and establish the
tion switch to position 3 but do not cause.
Note:
depress the accelerator pedal.
Use a valid key or valid spare key.
If necessary, cancel the starting
procedure after a maximum of 15
seconds and wait for about 1 minute Note:
before repeating the starting proced-
Each further starting attempt with an in- Observe the screen display: if mal-
ure. Turn the key fully back before
valid key increases the waiting period by
making a further attempt to start the function messages appear, determine
1 further minute.
engine. the cause and rectify it.

24 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Driving

Driving
Danger. Danger.
If there is insufficient pressure in the Environmental protection The freedom of movement of the ped-
compressed-air supply system (reservoir als must not be restricted. The operat-
Never warm up the engine while the bus
pressure operating displays remain on the ing safety and roadworthiness of the bus
is stationary. Instead, drive off and run
screen), a warning signal sounds until the would otherwise be at risk. Objects could
the engine at moderate speeds.
required pressure has been reached. Do fall and get caught between the pedals if
not release the parking brake until there you were to accelerate or brake suddenly,
is sufficient operating pressure. with the result that you would no longer
Note: be able to brake, depress the clutch ped-
The engine should not be placed under al or accelerate. You could cause an acci-
full load until it has reached normal op- dent and put yourself and other people in
erating temperature (75 °C - 90 °C de- danger.
pending on operating conditions and the
outside temperature). Check the freedom of movement of
the pedals

Danger. Danger.
All doors must be unlocked before the Where floormats and carpets are fitted,
bus is driven off. ensure that they are safely secured
against slipping and that there is
sufficient space for the pedals.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 25


Operation
Stopping the engine

Stopping the engine


Danger. Note:
Do not put any objects in the driver's Keep within the economical operating
footwell. range. Make sure that the engine speed
does not enter the danger zone (red
zone).
Danger.
Stow and secure all loose objects in Danger.
such a way that they cannot get into
the driver's footwell when the bus is in If a warning buzzer sounds when you are
motion. shifting gear, too low a gear has been
selected. Make sure that you keep the
Always pull away in 1st gear at 600 - clutch pedal depressed and select a suit- M54.00-2270-71
800 rpm. able gear for the current speed.
Stop the bus - Shift the transmis-
sion into neutral - Apply the park-
Danger. ing brake. Turn the ignition starter
Test the function of the service brake switch from position 2 (drive posi-
immediately after pulling away. tion) back to position 1.

Observe the rev counter while driv-


ing.

26 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Towing and tow-starting

Towing and tow-starting


Danger. Caution:
There is a risk of fire and burns due to Danger. Special measures are required in order
the high exhaust temperatures and the to protect the transmission if the bus is
Only authorised specialists (recovery ser- to be towed: for safety reasons the pro-
hot exhaust pipe for the auxiliary heating.
vice) are permitted to tow away broken- peller shaft must always be removed. The
For this reason, avoid parking the bus
down buses. The rules and regulations in propeller shaft securing screws at the
where ignitable material (e.g. dry grass,
the country concerned must be observed. axle flange must be removed and those
leaves, etc.) is in close proximity to the
exhaust system, engine and auxiliary heat- at the transmission flange secured against
ing exhaust system. displacement.
Danger.
The ignition switch of the vehicle being For notes on safety and operation re-
Note: towed must always be in position 1. The lating to the trailer coupling, refer to the
steering lock must not be engaged. Fail- “Operation” section.
Before you switch off the engine, allow
it to continue running at idling speed for ure to comply with this guideline could
approximately 1-2 minutes (to allow the result in the steering locking.
exhaust turbochargers to cool down if the
coolant temperature is high or if you have
been driving at full engine output (e.g. on Danger.
hilly roads)).
In buses with the Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP), this function must be deac-
tivated without exception - refer to the
“Operation” section

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 27


Operation
Towing and tow-starting

Note:
For notes on charging the compressed-air
system of a bus to be towed, refer to the
“Practical advice” section.

Screw the towing coupling into locat-


ing bore (1).

M00_00-0358-71 M00_00-0340-71

Front/rear towing hitch: Insert the rigid tow bar into towing
coupling (3) and secure with the
Note: linchpin. Turn linchpin (1) towards
the rear until it engages in lock (2).
To tow the bus, there are some towing
jaws in the vehicle tool kit that have to
be screwed into locating bore (1) provided Note:
behind the front flap or in the rear mem- Linchpin (1) must always remain engaged
ber. in lock (2) when the bus is being towed.

28 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Towing and tow-starting

Removal of the rigid tow bar in re- The following warning must be ob-
verse order Note: served in the event of towing.
The bus cannot be tow-started unless the
Note: batteries are fully charged (at least 21 V). Caution:
Pull lock (2) up slightly in order to disen- There is a risk of damage to the left-
gage linchpin (1) towards the front. hand exterior mirror caused by the towing
Caution: vehicle as the bus is being towed through
Towing with a raised front axle The bus must not be tow-started unless tight left-hand bends. There is a risk of
the batteries are connected. Turn the damage to the bus caused by the tow bar
Danger. ignition switch to the drive position. De- as the bus is being towed through tight
press the clutch pedal fully. Select 2nd right-hand bends. Observe the informa-
The ignition switch must not be switched or 3rd gear. Tow-start the bus, release tion/instructions on the sticker on the
to position 2 while the front axle is the clutch pedal and depress the acceler- tow bar.
raised. The wheels on the driven axle ator pedal until the engine is running.
may lock. Failure to comply could result
in brake intervention by the ABS/ASR
system, which could cause the rear axle
to skid. Note:
Vehicles with automated manual transmis-
Tow-starting (only for manual trans- sion (option) cannot be tow-started.
mission)

Note:
For notes on the jump-start procedure,
refer to the “Practical advice” section.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 29


Operation
Trailer towing

Trailer towing
Note: Note:
Observe the operating instructions issued It is prohibited to a couple a turntable
by the trailer manufacturer. trailer or any trailer equipped with ESP.
Danger.
Proceed with utmost care and caution
when hitching up the trailer. Make sure Note:
that no persons are present between the
trailer and vehicle as the vehicle is be- If the trailer coupling is a detachable
ing reversed into engagement with the coupling, the operating instructions is-
trailer. The overrun brake of a trailer can sued by the trailer coupling manufacturer
rebound uncontrollably when in overrun must be observed.
mode. To reduce the risk of serious injur-
ies, do not uncouple any trailer that has
an overrun brake if the trailer has over- Note:
run and the overrun brake is applied. A Trailers having a maximum gross weight
trailer that has been coupled to the tow- of higher than 3.5 t require that appro-
ing vehicle incorrectly could break away. priate body reinforcement measures be
A correctly coupled trailer must stand ho- implemented during vehicle manufacture.
rizontal behind the vehicle. Use a trailer In this case, ESP (Electronic Stability Pro-
with a height-adjustable drawbar if ne- gram) would no longer be available (even
cessary. The maximum permissible nose- with no trailer coupled).
weight and rear axle load of the bus must
not be exceeded.

30 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Loading a trailer

Loading a trailer Driving with a trailer If the trailer begins to swing from side to
Observe the following values when The following changes in handling side:
loading the trailer: characteristics can be observed when release the accelerator pedal
driving with a trailer attached: do not countersteer
the permissible gross weight of the
trailer acceleration and gradient-climbing brake if necessary
the permissible trailer load of the capability are reduced do not attempt to draw the vehicle/
vehicle and the trailer tow hitch braking distance is increased trailer combination out by accelerat-
the permissible noseweight sensitivity to crosswinds is increased ing
the permissible rear axle load of the directional stability is adversely af- The gradient-climbing capabilities from a
towing vehicle fected standstill refer to sea level. When driv-
the permissible gross weight of both fuel consumption is increased ing in mountainous areas, you should
the towing vehicle and the trailer bear in mind that the power output of
Avoid driving a vehicle/trailer combina-
the engine and thus its gradient-climb-
The definitive maximum permissible val- tion faster than 80 km/h, even in coun-
ing capability decrease with increasing
ues are listed in the vehicle documents tries where higher speeds are permitted.
altitude.
and on the identification plates of the Maintain a greater distance from the
trailer tow hitch, trailer and vehicle. If On long and steep downhill gradients,
vehicle in front than you would when
there are discrepancies between any of select a lower gear/shift range in good
driving without a trailer.
these sources, always consider the low- time. This makes use of the braking ef-
Avoid sudden braking where possible. fect of the engine, reducing the amount
est value to be valid. Brake gently at first to allow the trail- of braking effort required to maintain a
er to run on and quickly increase your safe speed. The load on the brake sys-
braking force. tem is therefore reduced, which helps to
prevent the brakes from overheating and
wearing too rapidly. If additional brak-
ing effort is required, do not depress the

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 31


Operation
Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) (option)

brake pedal with one continuous press, Ball hitch trailer coupling (fixed) Ball hitch trailer coupling and open-
but operate it at intervals. (option) jaw trailer coupling (detachable)
(option)
Danger. Note:
While the vehicle is in motion, never keep Observe the operating instructions issued Note:
the brake pedal continuously depressed, by the trailer manufacturer. Observe the operating instructions issued
e.g. by allowing the brakes to rub by by the trailer manufacturer.
resting your foot on the pedal. This would Secure the trailer against rolling
cause the brake system to overheat, in- away.
crease the braking distance and may res-
Reverse the vehicle until the towing Note:
ult in a complete loss of braking effect.
ball on the trailer drawbar is posi- Observe the operating instructions issued
tioned precisely above the ball end by the trailer coupling manufacturer.
on the vehicle.
Secure the trailer against rolling
Hitch the trailer as described in the away.
operating instructions issued by the
trailer manufacturer. The trailer coupling is fitted to the
mounting on the end cross member.
To gain access to the mounting, re-
move the cover from the bumper and
stow the cover inside the bus.

32 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Connecting the power supply

Connecting the power supply Trailer coupling maintenance


Clean the trailer coupling and lubric-
Note: ate it with multipurpose grease.
Before connecting the cable, check that Check the bolts securing the trailer
the voltage of the consumers on the trail- coupling to the end cross member
er is the same as the voltage of the con- for firm seating and retighten them if
sumers on the towing vehicle. necessary.

To gain access to the trailer socket,


remove the cover from the bumper
and stow the cover inside the bus.
M00_00-0512-71

Installation: slide catch (2) back- Insert the trailer connector into the
wards and hold in this position. Turn socket on the bus.
cover (3) through approximately 30°
and remove. Fit the trailer coupling Note:
in reverse order. Route the cable in such a way that it
yields to any movement without tension,
Note: kinking or friction, including movements
associated with cornering.
Removal in reverse order. The trailer
coupling must be removed whenever it Check that the lights on the trailer
is not in use. are clean and working correctly.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 33


Operation
Refuelling (diesel fuel)

Refuelling (diesel fuel) types of fuel such as marine diesel fuel,


The vehicle has a two-tank system fitted heating oils or fatty acid methyl ester Danger.
FAME (biodiesel fuel) are not permitted.
to the front of the front axle. The fuel Fuel is toxic and harmful to health. For
These types of fuel would cause irrevers-
tanks are interconnected through their ible damage to the engine and BlueTec®6
this reason, make sure that the fuel does
bases by a fuel line. The bus can be not come into contact with skin, eyes
exhaust gas aftertreatment system and
refuelled from either side. If the fuel or clothing, that you do not inhale fuel
considerably reduce expected service life.
tanks on your bus are interconnected, it vapours and that children are kept away
from the fuel.
is necessary to remove the fuel cap from
each of the fuel tanks. Danger.
The addition of flow improvers is not Risk of injury and explosion. Fuel is Danger.
permitted. highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and
If you or others have come into contact
Switch off the engine and auxiliary heat- smoking are therefore prohibited when
with fuel: In case of contact with the
ing before refuelling. Park the bus on a fuel is being handled.
eyes, rinse them immediately and copi-
level surface. ously with clean water and seek medical
Cleanliness is of utmost importance attention. Clean affected areas of skin
when refuelling. Do not leave cotton Danger. immediately with soap and water. Imme-
rags or cloths in the vicinity of the open Before refuelling, switch off the auxiliary diately change out of clothing that has
filler neck. heating to prevent fuel vapours from ig- come into contact with fuel. If fuel has
niting on the auxiliary heating exhaust been swallowed, seek medical attention
system. immediately.
Caution:
Refuel using only commercially available,
sulphur-free diesel fuel complying with
European standard EN 590 as revised
from 2010 onwards (max. 0.001 % sul-
phur by weight). Fuels containing more
than 0.001 % sulphur by weight or other

34 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning system

BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning


Environmental protection system Note:
If handled improperly, fuels constitute a AdBlue® is consumed at a rate of ap-
hazard to health and the environment. proximately 3 % of the rate of diesel fuel
Fuels must not be allowed to enter the consumption. It is recommended that the
sewerage system, surface water, ground- AdBlue® supply tank also be refilled at
water or soil. every regular refuelling stop.

To function correctly, the BlueTec® ex-


haust gas cleaning system requires the
addition of a reducing agent (AdBlue®).
The addition of AdBlue® does not form
part of the routine scope of bus main-
tenance – it is the responsibility of the
M47_00-0055-71
vehicle operators to ensure that the Ad-
The BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning sys- Blue® supply tank is regularly replen-
tem essentially comprises a supply tank, ished. Filling and operating the bus with
a catalytic converter and an AdBlue® AdBlue® is mandatory for compliance
metering system. It is monitored and with emission regulations and is thus
controlled electronically. Pollutants in one of the conditions for the road traffic
the exhaust gas are converted into en- approval of the bus. The road traffic ap-
vironmentally friendly substances by the proval of the bus will be invalidated if
addition of AdBlue® and the catalytic the bus is operated without AdBlue®. It
converter integrated into the silencer. would then be against the law to operate
The illustration above shows filler open- the bus on public roads. In some coun-
ing (1) for the AdBlue® supply tank (next tries, operation of the bus without Ad-
to the diesel tank). Blue® may be considered to be a crimin-
al offence or a violation of administrative
TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 35
Operation
BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning system

law punishable by fine. Support in the surised while the engine is warm. There
purchase or operation of the bus, i.e. tax Note: is a risk of scalding from hot AdBlue®
relief, road tax, may also be invalidated AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of ap- spraying out if the line system is suddenly
retrospectively. This may be the case proximately -11 °C. The bus is equipped opened. There is also the risk of skin ir-
both in the country in which the vehicle with an AdBlue® preheating system as ritation or damage to the eyes if AdBlue®
is registered and in other countries in standard. Winter operation is therefore comes into contact with the skin or eyes.
which the vehicle is operated. guaranteed, even at temperatures of be- Wear gloves
low -11 °C. Wear protective clothing
Danger. Wear safety goggles
Work on the exhaust gas aftertreat-
It is essential that work relevant to safety Environmental protection ment system should not be com-
or work on safety-related systems be car-
AdBlue® is biologically degradable. Un- menced until approximately 4 minutes
ried out at a qualified specialist work-
less it is handled properly, however, Ad- have passed as individual lines con-
shop.
Blue® constitutes an environmental haz- tinue to be flushed even after the
ard. Do not allow AdBlue® to enter the engine has been switched off.
sewerage system, surface water, ground- Switch the ignition starter switch to
Danger. water or soil in significant volumes. the “OFF” position and remove the
Always have maintenance work carried key before work is carried out on the
out at a qualified specialist workshop Danger. Risk of poisoning and SCR system.
which has the necessary knowledge and injury. Allow the AdBlue® line system to
tools. cool down
AdBlue® is not classified as a hazardous
substance by German regulations govern- Open line connections and system
ing hazardous substances. Nevertheless, component covers/caps slowly.
certain points should be observed when Capture any AdBlue® that escapes in
handling AdBlue®. a suitable container and dispose of
The AdBlue® line system and the system it in an environmentally responsible
components connected to it are pres- manner.

36 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
AdBlue® service product

Do not pour AdBlue® into drinks con- AdBlue® service product


tainers. AdBlue® is a non-flammable, colourless, Note:
Wipe up any spilled AdBlue®, espe- odourless water-soluble liquid. AdBlue® should not be swallowed or al-
cially as there is a risk of slipping. lowed to come into contact with skin,
AdBlue® collected in this way must eyes or clothing. Keep AdBlue® out of
Caution: the reach of children.
not be poured back into the AdBlue®
supply tank. Use only AdBlue® complying with DIN
70070/ISO 22241. Special additives are
Rinse affected areas of skin copiously
not permitted. Note:
with clean water.
Quickly change out of clothing that If you do come into contact with Ad-
has come into contact with the sub- Blue®, observe the following: Wash Ad-
stance. Caution: Blue® off skin immediately with soap and
In case of contact with the eyes, If, during a top-up, AdBlue® comes into water. If AdBlue® gets into the eyes,
rinse them immediately and copiously contact with painted or aluminium sur- rinse them immediately and copiously
with clean water and seek medical faces, rinse down these surfaces with wa- with clean water. Seek medical atten-
attention if necessary. ter immediately. tion without undue delay. If you have
swallowed AdBlue®, immediately rinse
If AdBlue® enters the mouth or is
your mouth out with water and then drink
swallowed, rinse the mouth out with
Note: plenty of water. Seek medical atten-
clean water and then drink plenty of
tion without undue delay. Change out
water. Avoid inhaling ammonia vapours. Fill the of clothing contaminated with AdBlue®
Seek medical attention if symptoms AdBlue® reservoir only in well-ventilated immediately.
persist. areas.
Properties of AdBlue® at high temperat-
ures

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 37


Operation
AdBlue® service product

AdBlue® additives by constituents dissolved out of non-ap-


Note: proved storage containers.
Ammonia vapours may be released as a Caution:
product of the decomposition of AdBlue® Disposal of AdBlue®
Do not add any additives to AdBlue®. Do
if the content of the AdBlue® tank heats not dilute AdBlue® with tap water. Doing
up to over 50 °C for a lengthy period so could destroy the exhaust gas clean- Note:
(e.g. as a consequence of direct sunlight). ing system. Damage to the exhaust gas Observe country-specific legislation and
cleaning system caused by additives/tap requirements governing the disposal of
water will invalidate the warranty. AdBlue®.
Note:
Ammonia vapours have an acrid odour. Storage AdBlue® purity
For this reason, you should avoid inhaling
any ammonia vapours that may escape Caution:
when you remove the AdBlue® filler cap. Note:
Ammonia vapours are an irritant mainly to For the storage of AdBlue®, use only con- It is prohibited to return to the tank any
skin, eyes and mucous membranes. tainers made from polypropylene, poly- AdBlue® that has been pumped out, e.g.
ethylene or high-alloy CrNi steels or Mo- during a repair, because the purity of the
CrNi steels complying with DIN EN10088- liquid would no longer be guaranteed.
Properties of AdBlue® at low temperat-
1/2/3. Containers made of aluminium,
ures copper, cupriferous alloys and non-alloyed
or galvanised steels are not suitable for
Note: the storage of AdBlue®. If stored in such
containers, AdBlue® could dissolve out
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of ap-
constituents of these metals and des-
proximately -11 °C. The bus is equipped
troy the exhaust gas cleaning system.
with an AdBlue® preheating system as
The vehicle warranty will be invalidated
standard. Winter operation is therefore
if damage to the exhaust gas cleaning
guaranteed, even at temperatures of be-
system is found to have been caused
low -11 °C.

38 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Filling with AdBlue®

Filling with AdBlue®


Note:
Note: AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of ap-
proximately -11 °C. The bus is equipped
An accidental filling of the AdBlue® sup-
with an AdBlue® preheating system as
ply tank with diesel fuel and vice versa is
standard. Winter operation is therefore
prevented by various technical precaution-
guaranteed, even at temperatures of be-
ary measures.
low -11 °C.

Note:
It is recommended that the AdBlue® sup- M54.00-2057-71
ply tank also be refilled at every regular
refuelling stop. Read AdBlue® fill level (1)

Note:
Caution: To read the AdBlue® level, call up the
Use only AdBlue® complying with DIN 70 relevant operating display using the dis-
070. Special additives are not permitted. play control pushbutton on the instrument
panel.

Caution:
If, during a top-up, AdBlue® comes into
contact with painted or aluminium sur-
faces, rinse down these surfaces with wa-
ter immediately.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 39


Operation
Diesel particulate filter

Diesel particulate filter


Under normal circumstances, automatic
regeneration of the diesel particulate fil-
ter is sufficient to avoid heavy soot load-
ing of the filter. However, if the bus is
predominantly driven short distances or
with the engine under low load, it might
not be possible for automatic regenera-
tion to finish successfully.
An indicator lamp in the instrument
M54.00-2056-71 M47_00-0055-71
cluster warns that the diesel particu-
late filter is nearing a high load state and
If the level in the AdBlue® supply Add AdBlue® to supply tank (1).
indicates that appropriate action needs
tank falls to approximately 33 %, icon
to be taken.
(1) appears on the screen to remind Note:
the driver that an AdBlue® top-up is The on-board computer gives prompt
AdBlue® supply tank (1) is located next warnings of emission-relevant malfunc-
due.
to the diesel tank. tions or user errors and displays their
The driver is informed by an icon on respective priority by means of yellow or
the display screen (see illustration) red alerts.
in conjunction with a yellow alert if Note:
If these messages are disregarded, there
the AdBlue® supply tank runs empty An accidental filling of the AdBlue® sup- is a risk of engine power output being
or if there is a malfunction in the ply tank with diesel fuel and vice versa is reduced and a need to exchange the
BlueTec® exhaust gas cleaning sys- prevented by various technical precaution-
diesel particulate filter prematurely.
tem. In this event, it is necessary to ary measures.
top up the AdBlue® level immedi-
ately or remedy the fault.

40 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Diesel particulate filter

up at a filling station, on dry grass or on


Note: Danger. harvested crop fields. The hot exhaust
As long as no flashing yellow or constant system could otherwise cause the highly
Exhaust fumes are produced during the
red malfunction alert appears, it can also flammable material to ignite and set the
automatic and manual regeneration pro-
be sufficient to alter the load profile (e.g. bus on fire.
cesses. If you were to inhale these ex-
take the bus for a drive on the motor- haust fumes, you could suffer harmful
way) in order to ensure that automatic effects such as poisoning. For this reas-
If the diesel particulate filter load state
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter on, the bus should always be parked out- becomes critical, a yellow indicator lamp
finishes successfully. doors. If, however, the bus is parked in lights up in the instrument cluster. The
an enclosed room, adequate ventilation on-board computer displays a yellow
must be ensured. event window prompting you to start
Note: manual regeneration. The manual regen-
In the event of a malfunction in the eration process lasts approximately 30
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment Danger. to no more than 60 minutes.
system, have the system checked Very hot exhaust fumes are expelled from
and repaired at a qualified specialist the exhaust tail pipe during the automatic Note:
workshop. and manual regeneration processes. Keep
The time needed for manual regeneration
well clear of the exhaust tail pipe. Other-
is dependent on the temperature of the
wise, you could be burned by the fumes.
exhaust system.

Danger.
Note:
Make sure that no highly flammable ma- If the yellow event window and its mes-
terials, e.g. dry grass or fuels, come into sage are disregarded, there is a risk of
contact with the exhaust system during engine power output being reduced and
the automatic and manual regeneration a need to exchange the diesel particulate
processes. Do not leave the bus parked filter prematurely.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 41


Operation
Diesel particulate filter regeneration

Diesel particulate filter regeneration


Danger. Note:
Functions:
Exposure to diesel soot and soot particles In addition, automatic regeneration is not
Automatic regeneration of the diesel possible with the engine idling or running
through contact or inhalation is harmful
to health and can lead to death. If you
particulate filter at an elevated idling speed. It cannot fin-
need to exchange a diesel particulate fil- Inhibiting automatic regeneration of ish without a good period of actual driving
ter yourself due to technical problems, the diesel particulate filter because this is the only time in which the
be sure to observe the information and necessary temperatures are reached in
Catalytic converter protection func-
instructions in the workshop information the exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
tion
and all applicable occupational safety and
accident-prevention regulations. Wear Automatic regeneration of the
gloves and a dust mask. Seal and pack diesel particulate filter Note:
a particle-laden diesel particulate filter in
Whenever the green “Particulate fil- If regeneration is in progress and one of
the original packaging immediately after
ter” indicator lamp in the instrument the operating conditions is subsequently
removal. A particle-laden diesel partic-
no longer fulfilled, the green indicator
ulate filter must be labelled and must cluster lights up, this means that the
lamp goes out prematurely and re-
not under any circumstances be left un- diesel particulate filter is undergoing generation is aborted.
covered indoors. automatic regeneration.

Note: Note:
Automatic regeneration does not start un- It restarts automatically when all neces-
less all necessary operating conditions sary operating conditions are fulfilled
have been fulfilled, e.g. engine oil or ex- again. If you possibly can, therefore,
haust gas temperatures sufficiently high avoid interrupting a journey while the
and engine running. green “Particulate filter” indicator lamp
is lit. This will prolong the period of
regeneration.

42 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Diesel particulate filter regeneration

cess. Neither automatic nor manual re-


Note: generation can then be initiated and re- Note:
If the elevated exhaust gas temperatures generation is stopped if it is already in The LED in the pushbutton goes out.
associated with regeneration may present progress.
a danger, e.g. where the heat produced Press the lower section of pushbutton Catalytic converter protection
may jeopardise safety, it is possible to in- (1). function
hibit the automatic regeneration process.
In very rare cases (e.g. frequent low
Inhibiting automatic regeneration Note: load operation with relatively low exhaust
of the diesel particulate filter The LED in the “Inhibit regeneration” temperatures), there is a possibility of
pushbutton comes on and no regenera- unburnt fuel collecting in the exhaust
tion can be started. system. The exhaust system could suffer
damage as a result.
To prevent this, the engine speed is
Caution: automatically increased for approxim-
Leave the regeneration inhibitor activated ately 20 to 30 minutes by the exhaust
only for as long as the danger exists. gas aftertreatment control module under
Whenever you activate the regeneration specific circumstances. This raises the
inhibitor, regeneration will continue to be exhaust temperature and burns off the
inhibited even after the next engine start. fuel.
To deactivate, press the lower section of
M54.00-2129-71 inhibit pushbutton (1) again.
If the elevated exhaust gas temperat-
ures associated with regeneration may
present a danger, e.g. where the heat
produced may jeopardise safety, it is
possible to inhibit the regeneration pro-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 43


Operation
Starting regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually

Starting regeneration of the diesel


Note: particulate filter manually Note:
A corresponding message appears on the Pull over safely with regard for other If the diesel particulate filter load state
display screen to indicate that the catalyt- traffic and leave the engine running. becomes critical, an indicator lamp
ic converter protection function is active. Park well clear of other vehicles, ob- lights up in the instrument cluster. The
jects and all flammable materials. on-board computer displays a yellow
event window prompting you to start
Note: manual regeneration. The manual regen-
Note: eration process lasts approximately 30 to
It is possible to interrupt this function by no more than 60 minutes, depending on
switching off the engine, engaging a gear Under normal circumstances, automatic
regeneration of the diesel particulate filter the temperature of the exhaust system.
or releasing the parking brake.
is sufficient to avoid heavy soot loading
of the filter. However, if the bus is pre- Apply the parking brake.
dominantly driven short distances or with Shift the transmission to neutral N.
the engine under low load, it might not
be possible for automatic regeneration to Take your foot off the accelerator
finish successfully. pedal.
If active, deactivate the regeneration
inhibitor.

Note:
refer to “Inhibiting automatic regeneration
of the diesel particulate filter”.

44 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Starting regeneration of the diesel particulate filter manually

When regeneration has finished, the the vehicle without initiating regenera-
indicator lamp in the instrument tion, you would not be able to start the
cluster goes out and engine speed regeneration process manually until after
drops to idling speed. a subsequent engine warm-up phase. If
you were to park the vehicle without initi-
ating regeneration and the AdBlue® were
Note: frozen, you would not be able to start the
Regeneration will be aborted automatically regeneration process manually until after
if you engage a gear, release the parking a thawing period of up to 60 minutes.
brake or activate the regeneration inhib-
itor by pressing the lower section of the
“Regeneration inhibitor” pushbutton.
M54.00-2129-71

Press and hold the upper section of


“Manual regeneration” pushbutton (1) Note:
for approximately 3 seconds. Engine speed drops to idling speed if the
process is aborted.
Note:
Manual regeneration cannot be started
unless the engine oil and exhaust gas Note:
temperatures are sufficiently high, the Regeneration cannot be started unless
AdBlue® is not frozen and the system is all necessary operating conditions have
functioning normally. been fulfilled, e.g. engine oil or exhaust
gas temperatures sufficiently high. If the
The indicator lamp in the instru- on-board computer prompts manual re-
ment cluster comes on and engine generation at low outside temperatures,
speed is increased. start the regeneration process before the
vehicle is parked. If you were to park

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 45


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: fuel system/exhaust gas cleaning system

Operating/malfunction displays: Exhaust gas cleaning malfunction Fault in the exhaust gas cleaning
fuel system/exhaust gas cleaning system
system
Fuel reserve

The malfunction indicator lamp lights up


in the event of a malfunction in the ex- The malfunction indicator lamp flashes
haust gas cleaning system (SCR system). in the event of a fault in the exhaust gas
Fuel level below approximately 10% of cleaning system (display if permissible
tank capacity Note: NOx values exceeded) or if the AdBlue
supply tank runs empty. If the mal-
The indicator lamp is located above the
AdBlue level function message was triggered by the
display screen in the instrument cluster.
AdBlue supply tank running empty, it is
necessary to top up the AdBlue level im-
mediately. If the AdBlue supply tank has
Danger.
run empty, the driver must have actively
Have the malfunction rectified by an acknowledged the AdBlue level operating
If the level in the AdBlue supply tank OMNIplus Service Partner immediately. display (see above) at some time previ-
falls to approximately 33%, the icon
ously.
above appears on the screen in conjunc-
tion with a yellow warning level malfunc-
tion message to remind the driver that
an AdBlue top-up is due.

46 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Function description: accident data recorder (ADR) (option)

Function description: accident data


Note: Danger. recorder (ADR) (option)
The indicator lamp is located above the Have NOx faults rectified immediately by The accident data recorder (ADR) is
display screen in the instrument cluster. an OMNIplus Service Partner. a system for detecting and record-
ing accidents and driving events, e.g.
pulling away against a kerb or sud-
Danger. den braking.
Have NOx faults rectified immediately by The ADR is activated automatically
an OMNIplus Service Partner. when the ignition is switched on.

Engine torque reduction


Note:
The ADR remains active for 3 days after
the ignition has been switched off and
continues to register all vehicle move-
ments (e.g. parking collisions).
Engine torque is reduced to approxim-
ately 60 % in the event of a NOx fault
(display if permissible NOx values ex-
ceeded). In this situation, a fault is also
present in the exhaust gas cleaning
system, i.e. the malfunction indicator
lamp flashes. If the fault was caused by
the AdBlue supply tank running empty,
the AdBlue level operating display (see
above) is also displayed. The AdBlue
supply tank must be filled immediately.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 47


Operation
Function description: accident data recorder (ADR) (option)

Following any critical traffic or acci-


Note: dent situation, it is possible to record
Indicator lamp (2) lighting up and a brief, an entry manually.
one-off buzzing sound means that at least
one event is stored. Note:
When pushbutton (1) is pressed follow-
ing an accident, the event (approximately
Note: 43 seconds before, during and after the
A sequence of four long buzzes indicates accident) is stored and remains write-pro-
that the ADR has detected a parking colli- tected for an extended period.
sion. Check your vehicle for damage.
M54_00-1502-71

As soon as the ignition is switched


on, the ADR carries out a self-test Note:
and provides audible notification of Eight short buzzes mean that the memory
the current operating status or the of the ADR is almost full to capacity. Ex-
presence of a hardware fault. port the events and have the memory
cleared.
Note:
A brief, one-off audible signal (buzzer in
Note:
the control panel) (4) indicates that the
ADR is ready for operation. Ten short buzzes mean that the ADR has
malfunctioned. Similarly, a malfunction is
present if no signal sounds.

48 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Brake system safety precautions

Brake system safety precautions Emergency braking Braking and stopping


In the event of danger, depress the Whenever the bus is driven over long
brake pedal fully. downhill stretches, you should make
Caution: use of the braking effect of the en-
Note: gine by shifting into a lower gear. To
The braking characteristics of the bus
relieve the service brake of load, use
may change if a yellow warning level mal- If you brake heavily at a speed of over
function in the brake system appears on the integrated retarder in accordance
30 mph (50 km/h) and Brake Assist is
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad- active, the brake lamps will flash rapidly. with the manufacturer's operating
opt a particularly cautious driving style. This provides a warning to road users instructions.
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as behind the vehicle.
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner. Note:
Except for emergencies, the service brake
does not usually need to be applied
Danger.
sharply.
The braking characteristics of the bus
have changed if a red warning level mal-
function in the brake system is displayed. Danger.
Pedal travel may increase under brak-
ing. ABS has been disabled. Stop the bus Always apply the parking brake before
immediately and disable it (traffic condi- you disembark. On uphill and downhill
tions permitting). Have the malfunction gradients, you must also chock the
rectified by an OMNIplus Service Partner wheels and turn the steering towards the
immediately. kerb.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 49


Operation
Brakes with anti-locking protection

Switch off the engine using the igni- Brakes with anti-locking protection unsafe distance behind a vehicle in front
tion switch. In the event of danger, the brake or driving too fast through bends.
pedal should be fully depressed. This
guarantees that all wheels are regu-
lated and the bus decelerates optim- Danger.
ally. If the bus is towing a trailer that does not
have ABS, this trailer could be overbraked
On a slippery road surface, you
if the brakes were applied with maximum
should also declutch so that the force. In this event, the driver must keep
braking effect of the engine cannot the trailer in view by checking the rear-
affect the ABS control intervention. view mirror. The bus equipped with ABS
remains steerable, thereby enabling the
Note: driver to keep the entire vehicle combina-
tion stable.
The retarder is deactivated automatically
for the duration of an ABS control inter-
vention.

Danger.
The anti-locking protection of ABS does
not relieve the driver of the responsib-
ility for adopting a driving style which
takes traffic and road conditions into ac-
count. While the directional stability and
steerability of the bus are improved under
braking, ABS is not able to avert the con-
sequences of, for example, driving at an

50 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Applying the parking brake

Applying the parking brake and this operating symbol appears on


Danger. the screen at the same time.
With the parking brake applied, ABS can
no longer perform its intended function -
risk of skidding.

Note:
A warning tone sounds if the ignition is
switched off without the parking brake
engaged.

M42.00-0854-71

Pull hand lever (1) out of released Danger.


position (a) and into engagement in Check the hand lever for full engage-
applied position (b). ment. To do so, attempt to press the
hand lever in the “release” direction (a)
Danger. without pulling release ring (1.1) out of
the detent position. The lever must not
Do not apply the parking brake unless the move.
bus is stationary. Always apply the park-
ing brake before you leave the driver's
area. On steep uphill and downhill gradi-
ents, you should also chock the wheels
and turn the steering towards the kerb.
The parking brake indicator lamp
lights up on the instrument panel

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 51


Operation
Releasing the parking brake

Releasing the parking brake Emergency braking in the event of


Note: failure of both brake circuits
To guarantee a faultless release of the
parking brake, the supply pressure must Danger.
be at least 6.3 bar. If the parking brake
indicator lamp does not go out even if A failure in brake circuits 1 and 2 will
there is sufficient supply pressure avail- jeopardise the operating safety and road-
able, there is a defect in the brake spring worthiness of the bus. Stop the vehicle
cylinder circuit or emergency release cir- immediately (traffic conditions permitting).
cuit. Have the brake system checked by Have the brake system checked by an
an OMNIplus Service Partner immediately. OMNIplus Service Partner immediately.

M42_00-0323-01 Note:
Pull release ring (1.1) out of the de- In the event of a failure in brake circuits
tent position (b) and move hand lever 1 and 2, it is possible to initiate emer-
(1) as far as the stop towards the gency braking using the parking brake
“Release” position (a). lever.

The indicator lamp and operating


symbol must go out.

52 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
EBS brake system (system description)

EBS brake system (system descrip-


Note: tion)
Parking brake lever (1) can be moved The electronic brake system (EBS) con-
rearwards to any position to enable the trols the vehicle's braking behaviour. The
driver to prevent the rear wheels from anti-lock braking system (ABS) and ac-
locking and to moderate the braking ef- celeration skid control (ASR) functions
fect.
are part of the electronic brake system
(EBS).
Danger. EBS helps to achieve a more rapid brak-
ing effect at the wheels. ABS prevents
Risk of accident. Applying the parking the wheels from locking above a speed
M42_00-0323-01
brake deactivates the anti-lock braking
equivalent to walking pace, regardless of
Pull release ring (1.1). Pull lever (1) system (ABS). You should exercise even
the road conditions.
slowly towards applied position (b) more caution when driving on slippery
and hold it in the desired position to roads because there would be a risk of EBS comprises two circuits: a purely
prevent it from automatically return- rear wheels locking. pneumatic brake circuit and a superim-
ing to released position (a). posed electropneumatic brake circuit.
Each wheel is equipped with sensors
Danger. that continuously record the rate of
brake pad wear. An overly worn brake
If it is necessary to perform emergency pad is indicated on the display screen
braking using the parking brake, do not by a service notification and by a yellow
allow the parking brake lever to engage
alert with the “Brake pad” symbol.
in the parking position. Keep release ring
(1.1) in the applied position. Under partial braking, the braking pres-
sures are adapted between the front axle
The bus is braked at the rear wheels and rear axle as a function of the brake
only.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 53


Operation
Acceleration skid control (ASR)

pad thickness to ensure even wear of Acceleration skid control (ASR) Brake Assist
the brake pads. Acceleration skid control prevents the Brake Assist interprets a dangerous situ-
drive wheels from spinning when pulling ation from the speed with which the
away or accelerating, regardless of road brake pedal is depressed and immedi-
surface conditions. ately generates maximum braking force.
Brake Assist acts to minimise braking
Danger. distances.

Acceleration skid control does not relieve


the driver of the responsibility for adopt-
ing a driving style which takes traffic and
road conditions into account. The bus
may skid out of control if ASR has been
switched off and the drive wheels start to
spin.

54 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Program (ESP) has been deactivated and
Dynamic handling control (FDR) acts to the drive wheels start to spin. Note:
prevent the bus from skidding or tilting It is recommended that the Electronic
(subject to the laws of physics), regard- Stability Program (ESP) be deactivated
less of vehicle load and road surface Note: using ESP OFF pushbutton (1) if traction
conditions, and particularly in critical In wintry conditions, optimum perform- problems are experienced when driving
ance of the Electronic Stability Program with snow chains fitted or over loose sur-
driving situations (e.g. sudden evasive
(ESP) cannot be achieved unless winter faces (e.g. sand or gravel).
manoeuvre or high cornering speed).
This is achieved by selective braking of tyres (M+S) are fitted.
individual wheels or, where necessary,
all wheels. Combined with acceleration
skid control (ASR), this system is called
the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
ESP remains operational even when the
service brake is applied or a continuous
brake is active.

Danger.
RISK OF ACCIDENT. The Electronic Sta-
bility Program (ESP) does not relieve the
driver of the responsibility for adopting a M42.00-0852-71
driving style which takes traffic and road
conditions into account. The ability of
ESP to restabilise the bus is subject to
the laws of physics. The bus may skid
out of control if the Electronic Stability

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 55


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Operating/malfunction displays: Circuit 2 supply pressure Brake circuit 1 or 2 pressure


brake system sensor malfunction
Circuit 1 supply pressure

If the supply pressure in circuit 2 falls


below 6.8 bar, a red warning level mal- The supply pressures in circuits 1 and 2
If the supply pressure in circuit 1 falls function is shown on the screen. At the are monitored by sensors. A red warning
below 6.8 bar, a red warning level mal- same time, the red parking brake indic- level malfunction is shown on the screen
function is shown on the screen. At the ator lamp lights up in the instrument if a sensor in at least one circuit fails.
same time, the red parking brake indic- cluster. The malfunction warning is not The display of the supply pressure af-
ator lamp lights up in the instrument cleared until the pressure has risen back fected alternates between the minimum
cluster. The malfunction warning is not above 7.2 bar. value (0 bar) and the maximum value (12
cleared until the pressure has risen back bar) in a 1 second cycle. At the same
above 7.2 bar. Danger. time, the red parking brake indicator
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
The braking characteristics of the bus
Danger. have changed if a red warning level
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may Danger.
The braking characteristics of the bus increase under braking. ABS has been
have changed if a red warning level The braking characteristics of the bus
disabled. Stop the bus immediately and have changed if a red warning level
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may disable it (traffic conditions permitting).
increase under braking. ABS has been malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may
Have the malfunction rectified by an increase under braking. ABS has been
disabled. Stop the bus immediately and OMNIplus Service Partner immediately.
disable it (traffic conditions permitting). disabled. Stop the bus immediately and
Have the malfunction rectified by an disable it (traffic conditions permitting).
OMNIplus Service Partner immediately. Have the malfunction rectified by an
OMNIplus Service Partner immediately.

56 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Circuit 3 supply pressure Parking brake applied braking effect of the retarder is restored
when the bus is subsequently braked at
speeds of over 25 km/h. This function
can be switched off using the continuous
brake OFF switch on the instrument pan-
el. This is indicated by this icon in the
If the supply pressure in circuit 3 falls If the parking brake is applied, this is “Betriebsanzeige Fahren” (Driving operat-
below 6.3 bar, a yellow warning level indicated by this icon in the “Betrieb- ing display) menu on the screen.
malfunction is shown on the screen. This sanzeige Fahren” (Driving operating dis-
malfunction warning is not cleared until play) menu on the screen. At the same Bus stop brake active
the pressure has risen back above 6.6 time, the red parking brake indicator
bar. lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Continuous braking OFF
Danger.
The braking characteristics of the bus This symbol is shown on the instrument
may change if a yellow warning level mal- cluster display screen whenever the bus
function in the brake system appears on stop brake is active. It is also shown
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad- whenever the drive-off lock is active (one
opt a particularly cautious driving style. The bus is equipped with a retarder, or more doors are open).
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as which provides additional braking force
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner. to supplement the service brake and is
activated whenever the brake pedal is Note:
depressed (brakes management). The Neither the bus stop brake nor the drive-
proportion of braking output contributed off lock can be deactivated unless the
by the retarder during this combined doors are closed and the bus stop brake
switch has been switched off. The “Ready
braking action is reduced if the speed
to depart” symbol is shown on the display
of the bus falls below 20 km/h. The screen.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 57


Operation
Activating the slip increase function of ASR (acceleration skid control)

Bus stop brake malfunction or Activating the slip increase function


Danger. emergency release switch operated of ASR (acceleration skid control)
Always apply the parking brake correctly
before you leave the driver's area. Risk of Note:
accident. To park the bus, always apply
This function is available only in vehicles
the parking brake. If necessary (e.g. on
without Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
steep uphill or downhill gradients), chock
This symbol appears on the instrument (option).
the wheels as an additional measure to
prevent the bus from rolling away. cluster screen if the sealed emergency
release switch (red, sealed security cap)
Ready to depart is operated or if control of the bus stop
brake/drive-off lock is interrupted.

Danger.
Have the brake system checked as soon
This symbol appears as soon as all the as possible by an OMNIplus Service Part-
doors are closed (drive-off lock with door ner.
open) or if the bus stop brake is act-
ive. The symbol goes out and the bus
stop brake/drive-off lock is deactivated M42_00-0540-71
as soon as the accelerator pedal is de- Press pushbutton (1) with the ignition
pressed. switch switched on in position 2.

58 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: ABS/ASR

Operating/malfunction displays:
Note: ABS/ASR
It is recommended that slip increase be Brake pad wear
Slip increase is activated. This icon activated under specific conditions (e.g.
snow chains, pulling away under extreme
appears on the instrument cluster
conditions) because the wheel speed at
display screen. which engine torque is reduced in the
event of spinning wheels on the driven
Danger. axle will be increased. An overly worn brake pad is indicated on
Risk of accident. When the slip increase Pressing pushbutton (1) again or the screen by a service notification and
function is active, the bus may become switching the ignition switch off and a yellow warning level malfunction alert.
unstable at the driven axle in the event of then back on again deactivates slip
unfavourable road conditions: accelerate
increase. Danger.
carefully.
The braking characteristics of the bus
may change if a yellow warning level mal-
Danger. function in the brake system appears on
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad-
Risk of accident. The slip increase does opt a particularly cautious driving style.
not relieve the driver of the responsibility Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
for adopting a driving style which takes possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.
traffic and road conditions into account.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 59


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: ABS/ASR

Brake pad wear indicator Acceleration skid control (ASR)


electronics Danger. active
The wheels could lock, especially on a
slippery surface - risk of skidding.

This icon and a yellow warning level mal- Danger. ASR is activated automatically if the
function are displayed if the connection The braking characteristics of the bus drive wheels on one or both sides start
to the electronics system (control unit) may change if a yellow warning level mal- to spin. An active ASR intervention is
of the brake pad wear indicator is mal- function in the brake system appears on indicated by this icon in the "Betrieb-
functioning or not available. the instrument cluster display screen. Ad- sanzeige Fahren" (Driving operating dis-
opt a particularly cautious driving style. play) menu on the screen. If the drive
ABS/ASR malfunction Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
wheels on one side start to spin, they
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.
will be braked automatically. - If the
drive wheels on both sides start to spin,
engine power output will be reduced
Danger.
automatically.
In the event of an ABS/ASR failure or The braking characteristics of the bus
malfunction, a red or yellow warning have changed if a red warning level
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may Danger.
level malfunction, depending on fault
increase under braking. ABS has been RISK OF ACCIDENT. Acceleration skid
severity, is displayed. disabled. Stop the bus immediately and control does not relieve the driver of the
disable it (traffic conditions permitting). responsibility for adopting a driving style
Have the malfunction rectified by an which takes traffic and road conditions
OMNIplus Service Partner immediately. into account.

60 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: ABS/ASR

ASR (acceleration skid control) slip


increase Danger. Note:
RISK OF ACCIDENT. When the slip in- Example of an icon for a fault on the
crease function is active, the bus may right-hand side of the driven axle on a
become unstable at the driven axle in the 2-axle bus.
event of unfavourable road conditions: ac-
celerate carefully. Brake pad wear sensor fault (3-axle
Pressing the “ASR slip increase” push- bus)
button when pulling away increases the Brake pad wear sensor fault (2-axle
wheel speed threshold above which en- bus)
gine torque is actively reduced to pre-
vent the wheels on the driven axle from
spinning. This results in improved trac-
tion in specific situations (e.g. snow This icon appears on the display screen
chains, pulling away under extreme con- in conjunction with a yellow warning
ditions). This icon appears on the display screen level malfunction if the brake pad wear
in conjunction with a yellow warning sensor has a fault.
level malfunction if the brake pad wear
Note:
sensor has a fault. Note:
This icon appears on the instrument
cluster display screen. If the icon does not go out even if you
Note: switch the ignition starter switch to OFF
If the icon does not go out even if you and back to ON, have the malfunction
switch the ignition starter switch to OFF rectified by an OMNIplus Service Partner.
and back to ON, have the malfunction
rectified by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 61


Operation
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description)

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)


Note: (function description)
Example of an icon for a fault on the left- Functions:
hand side of the trailing axle on a 3-axle
bus. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Note:
function description The yellow ESP indicator lamp lights up
Initialisation phase while the Electronic Stability Program
Handling in the event of understeer- (ESP) is intervening.
ing
Handling in the event of oversteering
Note:
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Dynamic handling control (FDR) is active
function description only at speeds of over 10 km/h. Dynam-
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ic handling control (FDR) is deactivated
whenever reverse gear is selected.
is an extension of the Electronic Brake
System (EBS), which already features the
anti-lock braking system (ABS) and ac-
Note:
celeration skid control (ASR). If the Elec-
tronic Stability Program (ESP) detects a The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
critical driving situation, automatic con- deactivated automatically in the event of
an ESP malfunction or a technically re-
trol interventions stabilise the bus by:
lated malfunction in the Electronic Brake
– reducing engine power output System.
– selectively braking individual wheels
– applying the brakes at all wheels

62 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (function description)

Initialisation phase phase is indicated by symbol (2) as an


operating display with no warning lamp. Note:
Handling in the event of The illustration shows a 2-axle bus as
understeering an example. In the case of 3-axle buses
equipped with RAS, the 3rd axle is regu-
lated separately as necessary.

Handling in the event of


oversteering

M54.00-2109-71

Whenever the ignition starter switch is


switched to ON, the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) undergoes an initialisa- M42_25_0003_01
tion process that lasts until the first few
The front axle of the bus deviates from
metres have been driven and the sensors
steered course (1) towards the offside
are checked for correct function. Dy-
of the road (2). Selective braking of the
namic handling control (FDR) is not yet
rear wheel on the nearside (3) restabil- M42_25_0002_01
functional during the initialisation phase,
ises the bus. The bus breaks out at the rear axle. The
although acceleration skid control (ASR)
is operational. If the system determines bus deviates from steered course (4) and
that correct operation is guaranteed, ini- turns towards the near side of the road
tialisation is completed and the system (5). Selective braking of the front wheel
is ready for operation. The initialisation on the offside (6) restabilises the bus.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 63


Operation
Deactivating the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Deactivating the Electronic Stability


Note: Program (ESP) Danger.
The illustration shows a 2-axle bus as RISK OF ACCIDENT. The bus may skid
an example. In the case of 3-axle buses out of control if the Electronic Stability
equipped with RAS, the 3rd axle is regu- Program (ESP) has been deactivated and
lated separately as necessary. the drive wheels start to spin.

Note:
It is recommended that the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) be deactivated
using ESP OFF pushbutton (1) if traction
problems are experienced when driving
M42.00-0852-71
with snow chains fitted or over loose sur-
faces (e.g. sand or gravel).
Press ESP OFF pushbutton (1).

Note:
Pressing “ESP OFF” pushbutton (1) again
or switching the ignition starter switch The control functions of the dynamic
to OFF and back to ON reactivates the drive control (FDR) and acceleration
Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
skid control (ASR) are disabled. The
“ESP OFF” icon appears on the dis-
play screen.

64 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Operating/malfunction displays: Brake system malfunction ABS/ASR malfunction


brake system
Brake pad wear

If a speed sensor fault was detected dur- In the event of an ABS/ASR failure or
ing the last drive cycle, a yellow warn- malfunction, a red or yellow warning
An overly worn brake pad is indicated on ing level malfunction is displayed on the level malfunction, depending on fault
the screen by a service notification and screen together with this icon. This con- severity, is displayed.
a yellow warning level malfunction alert. tinues to be shown until the static and
dynamic system tests have been com- Danger.
pleted.
Danger. The wheels could lock, especially on a
slippery surface - risk of skidding.
The braking characteristics of the bus Danger.
may change if a yellow warning level mal-
function in the brake system appears on The braking characteristics of the bus
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad- may change if a yellow warning level mal- Danger.
opt a particularly cautious driving style. function in the brake system appears on
The braking characteristics of the bus
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as the instrument cluster display screen. Ad-
may change if a yellow warning level mal-
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner. opt a particularly cautious driving style.
function in the brake system appears on
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad-
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.
opt a particularly cautious driving style.
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 65


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

spin, engine power output will be re-


Danger. duced automatically. Note:
The braking characteristics of the bus This symbol appears in the event of an
have changed if a red warning level Danger. intervention by dynamic handling control
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may (FDR) and by acceleration skid control
RISK OF ACCIDENT. Acceleration skid (ASR).
increase under braking. ABS has been
control does not relieve the driver of the
disabled. Stop the bus immediately and
responsibility for adopting a driving style
disable it (traffic conditions permitting).
which takes traffic and road conditions
Have the malfunction rectified by an Note:
into account.
OMNIplus Service Partner immediately.
During the initialisation phase of dynam-
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ic handling control, this icon appears on
Acceleration skid control (ASR) the screen as a normal operating display
active
active (without the warning lamp). At this time,
dynamic handling control is not yet func-
tional even though acceleration skid con-
trol (ASR) is ready for operation.

If the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)


ASR is activated automatically if the
is active, the control intervention and Danger.
drive wheels on one or both sides start
therefore the critical driving condition
to spin. An active ASR intervention is RISK OF ACCIDENT. The Electronic Sta-
is indicated on the instrument cluster bility Program (ESP) does not relieve the
indicated by this icon in the "Betrieb-
screen by this icon in conjunction with driver of the responsibility for adopting a
sanzeige Fahren" (Driving operating dis-
the yellow warning lamp. driving style which takes traffic and road
play) menu on the screen in conjunc-
conditions into account. The ability of
tion with the yellow warning lamp. If the
ESP to restabilise the bus is subject to
drive wheels on one side start to spin, the laws of physics.
they will be braked automatically. - If
the drive wheels on both sides start to

66 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Deactivating ESP
Danger. Danger.
RISK OF ACCIDENT. The bus may skid The braking characteristics of the bus
out of control if the Electronic Stability may change if a yellow warning level mal-
Program (ESP) has been deactivated and function in the brake system appears on
the drive wheels start to spin. the instrument cluster display screen. Ad-
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) opt a particularly cautious driving style.
can be deactivated using the ESP OFF ESP malfunction Have the malfunction rectified as soon as
pushbutton on the instrument panel. The possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner.
dynamic handling control (FDR) and ac-
celeration skid control (ASR) functions Circuit 1 supply pressure
are also disabled. This is indicated in the
"Betriebsanzeige Fahren" (Driving operat-
ing display) menu on the screen by this A malfunction in the dynamic handling
icon: control system (FDR) is indicated on the
instrument cluster screen by this icon
in conjunction with the yellow warning If the supply pressure in circuit 1 falls
Note: below 6.8 bar, a red warning level mal-
lamp.
Press the pushbutton again or switch the function is shown on the screen. At the
ignition starter switch to OFF and back to same time, the red parking brake indic-
ON to reactivate the Electronic Stability Note:
ator lamp lights up in the instrument
Program (FDR and ASR). Other brake system functions may con- cluster. The malfunction warning is not
tinue to work correctly. If any of these cleared until the pressure has risen back
fail, a separate fault message will be dis- above 7.2 bar.
played.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 67


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Danger. Danger. Danger.


The braking characteristics of the bus The braking characteristics of the bus The braking characteristics of the bus
have changed if a red warning level have changed if a red warning level have changed if a red warning level
malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may malfunction is displayed. Pedal travel may
increase under braking. ABS has been increase under braking. ABS has been increase under braking. ABS has been
disabled. Stop the bus immediately and disabled. Stop the bus immediately and disabled. Stop the bus immediately and
disable it (traffic conditions permitting). disable it (traffic conditions permitting). disable it (traffic conditions permitting).
Have the malfunction rectified by an Have the malfunction rectified by an Have the malfunction rectified by an
OMNIplus Service Partner immediately. OMNIplus Service Partner immediately. OMNIplus Service Partner immediately.

Circuit 2 supply pressure Brake circuit 1 or 2 supply Circuit 3 supply pressure


pressure sensor malfunction

If the supply pressure in circuit 2 falls If the supply pressure in circuit 3 falls
below 6.8 bar, a red warning level mal- The supply pressures in circuits 1 and 2 below 6.3 bar, a yellow warning level
function is shown on the screen. At the are monitored by sensors. A red warn- malfunction is shown on the screen. This
same time, the red parking brake indic- ing level malfunction is shown on the malfunction warning is not cleared until
ator lamp lights up in the instrument screen if a sensor in at least one circuit the pressure has risen back above 6.6
cluster. The malfunction warning is not fails. The display of the supply pressure bar.
cleared until the pressure has risen back affected alternates between the minim-
above 7.2 bar. um value (0 bar) and the maximum value
(12 bar) once every second. At the same
time, the red parking brake indicator
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

68 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Operating/malfunction displays: brake system

Continuous braking OFF Bus stop brake active


Danger.
The braking characteristics of the bus
may change if a yellow warning level mal-
function in the brake system appears on
the instrument cluster display screen. Ad-
opt a particularly cautious driving style.
The bus is equipped with a retarder, This symbol is shown on the instrument
Have the malfunction rectified as soon as which provides additional braking force cluster display screen whenever the bus
possible by an OMNIplus Service Partner. to supplement the service brake and is stop brake is active. It is also shown
activated whenever the brake pedal is whenever the drive-off lock is active (one
Parking brake applied depressed (brakes management). The or more doors are open).
proportion of braking output contributed
by the retarder during this combined Note:
braking action is reduced if the speed
The bus stop brake or the drive-off lock
of the bus falls below 20 km/h. The
cannot be deactivated unless the doors
braking effect of the retarder is restored are closed. The “Ready to depart” symbol
If the parking brake is applied, this is
when the bus is subsequently braked at is shown on the display screen.
indicated by this icon in the "Betrieb-
speeds of over 25 km/h. This function
sanzeige Fahren" (Driving operating dis-
can be switched off using the continuous
play) menu on the screen. At the same
brake OFF switch on the instrument pan- Danger.
time, the red parking brake indicator
el. This is indicated in the "Betriebsan-
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Always apply the parking brake correctly
zeige Fahren" (Driving operating display)
before you leave the driver's area. Risk of
menu on the screen by this icon. accident. To park the bus, always apply
the parking brake. If necessary (e.g. on
steep uphill or downhill gradients), chock
the wheels as an additional measure to
prevent the bus from rolling away.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 69


Operation
Operating 230/400 V systems (option)

Ready to depart Operating 230/400 V systems


Danger. (option)
Have the brake system checked as soon Special safety precautions must be taken
as possible by an OMNIplus Service Part- when operating 230/400 V systems;
ner. these will be described below:
This symbol is displayed as soon as all
the doors are closed. The symbol goes Danger.
out and the bus stop brake/drive-off Maintenance and repair work may only be
lock is deactivated as soon as the accel- carried out by personnel who have under-
erator pedal is depressed. gone the appropriate special training.
Bus stop brake OFF
The system manufacturer's safety and
operating information must be observed
without fail.

This symbol appears on the instrument


Danger.
cluster screen if the sealed emergency
release switch (red, sealed security cap) Residual current devices fitted in the bus
is operated or if control of the bus stop must be function-tested at regular inter-
brake/drive-off lock is interrupted. vals.

The following safety precautions are an


absolute requirement if the 230/400 V
system is to be supplied by an outside
feed:

70 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Fitting the skibox (option)

Fitting the skibox (option)


Note:
Check any extension lead used for dam- Danger.
age before plugging it in.
The skibox may only be transported,
stored and assembled by using the sub-
assemblies and fastening elements that
Note: are designed for that purpose.
The networks to which the 230/400 V
system is connected must have protection
in the form of a residual current device. Danger.
Otherwise, plug in an external RCD as an
adapter. The installation of a skibox changes the M88_00-0019-01
bus length and any installed reversing The skibox is fitted to the bus by
monitor (park pilot) no longer functions. pinning the four swivel bearings on
Note: the left and right-hand side of the
Check the correct operation of this RCD outer frame to the bearing pedestals
by pressing the test button. Only then on the bus using pins secured with
should you connect the 230/400 V sys- split pins (1).
tem of the bus to the mains supply.
Note:
A fork lift truck should be used to raise
the box to the correct height to ease as-
sembly onto the bus.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 71


Operation
Fitting the skibox (option)

Danger.
Before the bus is driven, it is necessary
to check that all pins (1) are firmly seated
and correctly secured by split pin (2).

Danger.
All lighting equipment must be checked
for correct operation before the bus is
driven. In addition, it is necessary to
M88_00-0021-01 M88_00-0019-01
check that the rear foglamp only works
Only ever stake the lower locating The skibox can only be fitted to on the skibox and no longer on the bus.
eyes with one pin at a time - never buses upon which the correct brack-
two at once. ets are installed.
Danger.
Danger. Note: The skibox cover must be closed and
Risk of injury. Make sure that the rear The electrical connection must be estab- locked when the bus is being driven.
gas strut (1) prestresses the bar. lished between the bus and skibox once
the skibox has been mounted.

72 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Swivelling the skibox (option)

Swivelling the skibox (option)

Caution:
Before the box is swivelled it must firstly
be unloaded (follow instructions on the
sticker on the skibox frame).

M88_00-0019-01 M88_00-0021-01

Pull both locating pins (1) on the left- This catch (2) (orange-yellow push
hand side when viewed in the direc- handle on the gas strut (1)) must
tion of travel (after removing secur- firstly be raised to allow the box to
ing split pin (2)) and swivel the box swivel back.
to the right side until the gas strut
Reinsert the locating pins and secure
has reached its end position and the
with securing split pins.
catch for preventing the box from
swivelling back unintentionally has
snapped in place.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 73


Operation
Additional operating instructions for the skibox (option)

Additional operating instructions for To adjust the height of the support Note on maintenance work
the skibox (option) arms, remove the fasteners first.

Danger. Danger. Note:


The permissible gross vehicle weight must Whenever the height has been adjusted, All maintenance work is described in a
not be exceeded. (Observe the instruc- the respective fastener must be refitted separate manual. For further information,
tions on the sticker inside the skibox.) to the support arm and clipped into the please consult your EvoBus Service Part-
wall rail. ner.
Pull the folding step for loading and
Danger.
unloading out of the retaining tubes,
After the skibox has been loaded, the hook it in using the hooks and fold it
belts over the support arms must be out.
lashed firmly over the retaining frames
in order to secure the load. If there are defective bulbs in the
lamp holders, they must be replaced
by pulling out the connector sockets
Caution: and unscrewing the bayonet fitting.
The use of corrosive soaps for skibox
cleaning and care is not permitted (ob-
serve the manufacturer's instructions). If
an unacceptable amount of dirt has accu-
mulated on the skibox, you should clean
it using water and a car shampoo. The
use of a high-pressure cleaner is permit-
ted provided you operate it and treat the
skibox with care.

74 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Care and cleaning

Care and cleaning apparent until much later and could cause
Danger. the tyre or suspension air bag to burst.
You could then lose control of your bus
Risk of poisoning. Always keep care and
and cause an accident, which could result
Note: cleaning products sealed and out of the
in injury to yourself and others.
reach of children.
Observe the laws and regulations in all
countries concerned.
Caution:
Danger.
Do not work with high-pressure cleaners
Danger. Risk of poisoning. Diesel, regular and or steam cleaners in the region of axle
premium-grade fuels are harmful to seals (e.g. hubs, drive flange) and axle
Risk of injury. Whenever work is carried health. They should not be used as a
out on the bus, all applicable safety regu- breathers. In automatic vehicle washes,
cleaning product. make sure that these areas will not be
lations must be observed (e.g. operating
instructions, environmental laws and reg- severely subjected to jets of water.
ulations, occupational safety and accident
prevention regulations, etc.). Danger.
Risk of fire. Diesel, regular and premium- Caution:
grade fuels are highly flammable. They We recommend that only tested and ap-
Danger. should not be used as a cleaning product. proved care products should be used. In-
formation about acceptable care products
Risk of poisoning. Observe the instruc-
can be obtained from your OMNIplus Ser-
tions for use of the care and cleaning
Danger. vice Partner.
products.
Do not use round-spray jets to clean tyres
or suspension air bags. The pulsating jet
of water could cause concealed damage
to the tyre substructure or suspension
air bags. This damage would not become

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 75


Operation
Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels

Care/cleaning of light-alloy wheels


Caution: Caution:
For cleaning work in the engine compart- The bus must be cleaned more frequently Danger.
ment, the use of cleaning agents contain- in winter to remove salt residues from
ing acetone or chloroethylene is prohib- road gritting. Observe the general information/safety
ited. precautions in this section.

Environmental protection
Caution: Caution:
Dispose of empty containers, cleaning
If you are using a steam cleaner to per- Clean light-alloy wheels regularly.
cloths and polishing wads in an environ-
form cleaning work in the engine com- mentally responsible manner.
partment, do not aim the jet directly at Clean the light-alloy wheels regu-
belt tensioners or idler pulleys. larly with warm water (preferably with
a high-pressure cleaner) and a soft
sponge.
Caution:
Stone chips and impurities, especially in- Danger.
sect remains, bird droppings, tree res-
Do not use round-spray jets for cleaning
ins, oils and greases, fuels and tar stains,
tyres. The pulsating jet of water could
should be remedied immediately with the
cause concealed damage to the tyre sub-
use of approved care products.
structure. Damage to the tyre substruc-
ture would not become apparent until
much later and could cause the tyre to
burst. You could then lose control of your
bus and cause an accident, which could
result in injury to yourself and others.

76 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Care and cleaning of covers, upholstery and ceiling

For heavy soiling, use a cleaner for Care and cleaning of covers,
light-alloy wheels. Caution: upholstery and ceiling
Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. Special notes on care and cleaning
Note: They can cause corrosion to the wheel of covers and upholstery
bolts (wheel nuts) or the retaining springs
Alcoa Dura-Bright® wheels need only
of the balance weights.
soap and water to retain their sheen.
Note:
These wheels should not be polished us-
ing a standard polish such as ALpolish. Observe the information about your up-
holstered furnishings and covers con-
tained in the detailed description of the
bus.
Note:
Further information: Alcoa Wheel
Caution:
Products Europe, www.alcoawheels.com.
Do not use cleaning products containing
solvents (e.g. petroleum ether, acetone,
Caution: alcohol, etc.). This would damage covers
and equipment parts made of plastic or
We recommend that only tested and ap- foam beyond repair.
proved care products should be used. In-
formation about acceptable care products
can be obtained from your OMNIplus Ser-
Caution:
vice Partner.
To avoid a bleaching out of colours, use
only pH-neutral care and cleaning agents.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 77


Operation
Care/cleaning of fabric covers

Care/cleaning of fabric covers


Note: Caution:
These notes on care also apply to clean- Danger. Do not use rubber vacuum nozzles or
ing of the ceiling. rubber attachments. These could pull
Observe the general information/safety threads out of the upholstered covers.
precautions in this section.
Using a soft brush, brush the fabric
along the nap.
Note:
Regular care and basic cleaning help to Basic cleaning - every six months
maintain the value and high-quality ap- First carry out the weekly basic
pearance of fabric covers. For this reas- cleaning.
on, carry out basic cleaning regularly.
Carry out basic cleaning more regularly Work up a foam from a mild, luke-
if necessary, depending on use and the warm soap solution (e.g. from a
level of dirt. mild-action detergent).
Apply the foam evenly over all the
Basic cleaning - weekly covers using a soft, slightly damp
Vacuum the covers thoroughly along sponge.
the nap of the fabric. Wait until the freshly cleaned covers
are completely dry.

78 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Care/cleaning of fabric covers

Caution: Note: Caution:


The covers must be completely dry before Always clean up the dirt from the outside If in any doubt, use a professional textile
they are sat on again. Permanent pres- in to prevent it from being dispersed in cleaning company.
sure marks could otherwise form. the fabric.

Brush along the nap of the fabric Mop up the soap solution using a
using a soft brush, without applying clean, soft sponge.
pressure. Wait until the freshly cleaned areas
Removing stains are completely dry.

Caution:
Caution:
The covers must be completely dry before
Remove dirt as soon as possible to pre-
they are sat on again. Permanent pres-
vent permanent stains or damage to the
sure marks could otherwise form.
covers.
Finally, brush the cover and the
Remove as much dirt as possible
cleaned areas using a soft brush
using a lint-free cloth.
along the nap of the fabric.
Using a soft sponge, work a mild,
lukewarm soap solution into the dirt
in circular movements from the out-
side in. Apply light pressure when
doing this.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 79


Operation
Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers

Care/cleaning of micro-fibre covers


Caution: Caution:
Danger. Do not use rubber vacuum nozzles or The covers must be completely dry before
rubber attachments. These could pull they are sat on again. Permanent pres-
Observe the general information/safety threads out of the upholstered covers. sure marks could otherwise form.
precautions in this section.
Using a soft brush, gently brush the Brush along the nap of the fabric
upholstery down along the nap of the using a soft brush, without applying
Note: fabric. pressure.
Regular care and basic cleaning help to
maintain the value and high-quality ap- Basic cleaning - every six months Removing stains
pearance of micro-fibre and wool covers. First carry out the weekly basic
For this reason, carry out basic cleaning
cleaning. Caution:
regularly. Carry out basic cleaning more
regularly if necessary, depending on use Work up a foam from a mild, luke- Remove dirt as soon as possible to pre-
and the level of dirt. warm soap solution (e.g. from a vent permanent stains or damage to the
mild-action detergent). covers.
Basic cleaning - weekly Apply the foam evenly over all the
Vacuum the covers along the nap of covers using a soft, slightly damp
Caution:
the fabric, without applying pressure. sponge.
Do not use cleaning products containing
Wait until the freshly cleaned covers
solvents (e.g. petroleum ether, acetone,
are completely dry. alcohol, etc.). This would damage the
micro-fibre covers and equipment parts
made of plastic or foam beyond repair.

Remove as much dirt as possible


using a lint-free cloth.

80 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Care/cleaning of leather covers

Using a soft sponge, work a mild, Care/cleaning of leather covers


lukewarm soap solution into the dirt Caution:
in circular movements from the out- The covers must be completely dry before Danger.
side in. Apply light pressure when they are sat on again. Permanent pres-
doing this. sure marks could otherwise form. Observe the general information/safety
precautions in this section.

Note: Finally, brush the cover and the


cleaned areas using a soft brush
Always clean up the dirt from the outside Caution:
in to prevent it from being dispersed in
along the nap of the fabric.
To avoid leaving chalky outlines or water
the fabric.
marks, use only distilled water for clean-
Caution:
ing.
If in any doubt, use a professional textile
Caution: cleaning company.
Do not use cleaning products containing Caution:
solvents (e.g. petroleum ether, acetone,
Minimise exposure to direct sunlight to
alcohol, etc.). This would damage the
avoid colour fading.
micro-fibre covers and equipment parts
made of plastic or foam beyond repair.

Mop up the soap solution using a


clean, soft sponge.
Wait until the freshly cleaned areas
are completely dry.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 81


Operation
Care/cleaning of leather covers

Remove the soap solution used using


Note: Caution: clean, distilled water.
Regular care and basic cleaning help to Do not use a cloth or sponge with a
maintain the value and high-quality ap- rough surface as this could scratch the Note:
pearance of leather covers, as well as the leather upholstery or damage it beyond
All dirt and soap residues must be com-
long-term durability and suppleness of the repair.
pletely removed. If in doubt, rinse again.
leather. For this reason, carry out basic
cleaning at least four times a year. Carry
out basic cleaning more regularly if neces- Caution:
sary, depending on use and the level of Note:
dirt. To prevent the formation of permanent
To avoid the formation of outlines, not
pressure marks, leather upholstery has to
only should the mark be treated but also
be dried off fully before subsequent use.
Basic cleaning - every quarter the wider area around it.

Remove coarse dirt with a very soft Removing stains


Then dry the cleaned areas using a
brush or a vacuum cleaner. hairdryer set to medium heat, keep-
Caution: ing it moving in a circular motion at a
Caution: Remove dirt as soon as possible to pre- distance of 30 cm to 40 cm.
Do not use a sharp-edged vacuuming vent permanent stains or damage to the
nozzle or too hard a brush, otherwise you covers. Caution:
could damage the leather beyond repair.
Remove as much dirt as possible The leather covers must be completely
dry before they are sat on again. Perman-
Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with using a soft, lint-free cloth.
ent pressure marks could otherwise form.
distilled water. Gently work a mild, lukewarm soap
Wipe leather upholstery down with a solution into the dirty area.
damp cloth. Then wipe the dirt up using a clean
cloth.

82 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Operation
Care/cleaning of leather covers

Caution:
If in any doubt, use a professional leather
cleaning company.

Leather care products

Note:
Information about suitable leather care
products can be obtained from your
OMNIplus Service Partner or from a
professional leather cleaning company.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 83


84 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
At a glance
Table of contents

Driver's area overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88


Switches on the left section of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Switches on the right section of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Tachograph (installation position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DTCO tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Destination display safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Destination display control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Door pushbutton in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Scope of tools and emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Location of the fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Location of the first-aid kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Tow bar location (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Location of spare mirror (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Emergency hammer (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 85


At a glance
Table of contents

Driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110


On-board kitchenette refrigerator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Tour guide refrigerator control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15 RHD (example of 2-axle bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Design and function description: fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Operating and malfunction displays: fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

86 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 87


At a glance
Driver's area overview

Driver's area overview

88 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Switches on the left section of the instrument panel

No. Description Page No. Description Page Switches on the left section of the
instrument panel
A Switches on the 89 I Parking brake and
130
left section of the emergency release Note:
instrument panel device The overview shows the maximum utilisa-
B Switches on the 94 J Master tion of the instrument panel with switches
152
right section of safety switch in their designated position. To accom-
(emergency-off modate the customisation requirements
the instrument
switch) (national of the customer, the switches may have
panel
been assigned to different positions on
variant)
C Instrument cluster the instrument panel.
D Steering column
124
switch for light
and wiper func-
tions
E Steering column
switch for retarder
and cruise control
(option)
F Adjustable steer-
129
ing column
G Ignition switch
129
H DTCO tachograph
100

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 89


At a glance
Switches on the left section of the instrument panel

90 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Switches on the left section of the instrument panel

No. Description Page No. Description Page No. Description Page

0 Mirror adjuster 6 Pushbutton for GO 12 Night lighting


153 155 158
240-8 transmis- switch
1 Windscreen roller sion shift system
153
sunblind pushbut- failsafe mode (op- 13 Front roof hatch
ton (option) tion) (activation of pushbutton - air
2 Pushbutton for failsafe mode and in/air out (option)
153 R)
co-driver's roller 14 Rear roof hatch
sunblind (option) 7 Display control pushbutton - air
156
3 Diesel particulate pushbutton in/air out (option)
154
filter (DPF) re- 15 Attendant call sys-
generation start/ 8 Driver's area light- 159
156 tem switch
inhibit ing switch
4 Electronic Stability 16 “School bus oper-
154 9 ADR button (acci- 159
Program (ESP) 168 ation” pushbutton
dent data record-
OFF pushbutton (option)
er) (option)
5 Pushbutton for GO 17 Audible reverse
155 10 Reading lamps 159
240-8 transmis- 157 warning feature
switch
sion shift system switch (option)
failsafe mode (op- 11 Passenger-com- 18 Driver's power
tion) (2/4 and N) 157 160
partment lighting window pushbut-
switch positions ton
I+II

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 91


At a glance
Switches on the left section of the instrument panel

No. Description Page No. Description Page No. Description Page

19 Pushbutton for 26 Central locking 33 Selection pushbut-


160 163 165
raising/lowering pushbutton for the ton for intercom
the bus right-side luggage in the driver's rest
20 Normal-level push- compartment area/kitchenette
160 (option)
button 27 Creep mode push-
155
button 34 Rotary light switch
21 Passenger stop 123
161
request system 28 Kitchenette en-
enabling switch 163
abling switch (op-
22 Switch for the tion)
161
driver's window 29 Lavatory enabling
heating/mirror 163
switch (option)
heating
23 30 Switch for elec-
Windscreen heat- 164
162 trical circuits >
ing switch (option)
100 V (option)
24 Horn changeover 31 Seat microphone
162 164
switch (option) switch

25 Central locking 32 Pushbutton for


162 164
pushbutton for the hanging up the
left-side luggage intercom (option)
compartment

92 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 93


At a glance
Switches on the right section of the instrument panel

Switches on the right section of the


instrument panel

94 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Switches on the right section of the instrument panel

No. Description Page No. Description Page

35 Infrared sensor 41 Switch for deac-


165
for DVD changer tivating pedal-ac-
remote control tivated continuous
36 Infrared sensor for braking
TV tuner 42 Bus stop brake
166
37 Control panel for pushbutton (op-
audio/video sys- tion)
tem in driver’s 43 Hazard warning
area and passen- 166
lamps switch
ger compartment
38 Control panel for 44 Door I pushbutton
167
audio/video sys-
tem in driver’s
45 Door II pushbutton
area and passen- 167
ger compartment
39 Heating/ventila- 46 Bus stop brake
220 167
tion/air-condition- emergency release
ing (HVAC) control switch (option)
panel
40 Cigarette lighter
(option)

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 95


At a glance
Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

96 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Instrument cluster

No. Description Page No. Description Page No. Description Page

1 Indicator lamp for 9 Tyre pressure 18 Exhaust gas clean-


the left-hand turn warning lamp ing system (SCR
signals system) malfunc-
10 Indicator lamp for
tion display
2 Dipped-beam in- the right-hand turn
dicator lamp signals 19 Selector but-
ton for trip
3 Main-beam indic- 11 ESP lamp OFF
meter/time
ator lamp 12 ABS warning lamp
20 Button for on-
4 Front foglamp in-
13 Diesel particulate board diagnostics
dicator lamp
filter (DPF) indicat- - “System”
5 Red warning level or lamp
21 Button for on-
malfunction lamp
14 Indicator lamp for board diagnostics
6 Yellow warning DPF regeneration - “Quit”
level malfunction in progress 22 Button for on-
lamp board diagnostics
15 Active Brake As-
7 ESP indicator sist OFF warning - “Reset”
lamp lamp 23 Button for on-
8 Parking brake and 16 Tachograph indic- board diagnostics
brake system mal- ator lamp - “Info”
function indicator 24 Button for screen
17 Exhaust gas clean-
lamp brightness
ing malfunction
display

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 97


At a glance
Tachograph (installation position)

No. Description Page Tachograph (installation position)


Tachograph (1) is located in the lower
25 Total distance section of the centre console to the right
reading and clock of the driver's area.
display
26 Screen (display)

M68_00-0215-71

98 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 99


At a glance
DTCO tachograph

DTCO tachograph

100 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
DTCO tachograph

1 Display screen: Screen dis- 4 Download/calibration inter- 7 Printer drawer release but-
plays vary according to the face: There is an interface ton: This button is used to
operating state of the bus. under the cover. This in- release the printer drawer, for
refer to “Display variants” terface cannot be enabled example, for inserting a new
in the manufacturer's operat- without an inserted company roll of paper.
ing instructions. card, control card or work- 8 Tear-off edge
2 Key panel, driver 1 shop card. 9 Menu buttons: Buttons for
For details, refer to “Access entering, displaying or printing
Note: rights for tachograph cards” data.
in the manufacturer's operat- Refer to “Calling up menu
Activity button, driver 1/card
slot ejector button, driver 1
ing instructions. functions” in the manufac-
5 Key panel, driver 2 turer's operating instructions.
3 Card slot, driver 1: Driver 1,
the current driver of the bus,
inserts his driver card into Note:
card slot 1. Activity button, driver 2/card
slot ejector button, driver 2
Note: 6 Card slot, driver 2: Driver
Insert the card with the chip 2, who is not currently driv-
facing upwards in the direc- ing the bus, inserts his driver
tion of the printed arrow. card into card slot 2.

Note:
Insert the card with the chip
facing upwards in the direc-
tion of the printed arrow.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 101


At a glance
Tachograph

Tachograph 10 Display field for total distance Destination display safety precau-
recorder, time, trip meter tions

For notes on safety and operation,


11 Selection button for time, trip also refer to the manufacturer's operat-
meter ing instructions.
Press this button briefly to change the
display (10) between the time and trip
meter. Press and hold to reset the trip
meter to 0.

M68_00-0121-01

8 Speed display

9 Warning lamp
When lit, this means that there is a mes-
sage on the tachograph display screen.
Driver symbol + fault code = operator er-
ror (card missing or inserted incorrectly).
Fault code = system fault (contact a ser-
vice centre).

102 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 103


At a glance
Destination display control panel

Destination display control panel

104 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Destination display control panel

Route and/or destination numbers (3 Button 1 Button 9


or 4-digit numbers) are entered by the
Route/destination protocol selection To decrease the tens digit
driver using the control panel for the
destination display. Button 1 can be Button 2 Button 10
used to toggle between the route and Confirmation of the selected message To decrease the ones digit
destination numbers protocol. The act-
ive protocol is displayed on the control Button 3 Load slot (11)
panel's display screen. Each digit can be To increase the thousands digit Using the PCMCIA card (short: PC card),
increased or decreased. Pressing button which is inserted into the load slot, it is
2 sends the set number in the protocol Button 4 possible to load customer-specific data
selected to the displays (front, side and To increase the hundreds digit or software and store it to the control
rear). This number represents the route unit. The following message appears on
and/or destination number of the bus. Button 5 the control panel's display screen follow-
To increase the tens digit ing a successful transfer: DOWNLOAD
Note: OK. The following message appears if
Button 6
Switch on the ignition switch before oper- the data could not be transferred: NO
ation. To increase the ones digit VALID DATA.
Button 7
Note: To decrease the thousands digit
The data last displayed are stored so that Button 8
the last settings are retained following a
To decrease the hundreds digit
power supply interruption.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 105


At a glance
Door pushbutton in the driver's area

Door pushbutton in the driver's


area Danger.
Door pushbutton for front right door (I) The doors do not operate if the display
and centre right door (II) (10) with integ- flashes. Do not move the bus if a warn-
rated warning lamps (locator lighting also ing lamp in the door pushbutton lights
ON when Lights ON). up or a yellow or red warning is shown
on the display screen. Otherwise, a red
warning appears on the display screen
Note: and the warning buzzer sounds.
The warning lamp lights up when: - a
door is open - a door is not fully closed
(door not in the catches). Note: M72_00-0332-71

A door cannot be operated unless the


ignition is ON, the bus is stationary and
Note: the doors have been unlocked.
The warning lamp flashes in the follow-
ing situations: - the emergency switch is
activated - the operating pressure is too
low (depressurised bus door) - the door
is open and the speed of the vehicle is
more than 3 km/h - the door malfunc-
tions.

106 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Scope of tools and emergency equipment

Scope of tools and emergency Location of the fire extinguishers Location of the first-aid kits
equipment
Tools and emergency equipment:
Warning triangle
Hydraulic jack 10 t maximum load
with base board (observe the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
Hydraulic jack 5 t maximum load
(3-axle buses only) (observe the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Ramp
M86_00-0055-01 M86_00-0126-01
Wheel chock
A hand fire extinguisher (1) is located First-aid kits (1) are fitted behind the
WAF 27/32 socket spanner
under the first row of seats on the right driver's seat on the left-hand side.
Towing bolt/towing coupling when viewed in the direction of travel.
Crank for emergency operation of the
Note:
driver's window
Note: Check the expiry dates of the contents
Tool box (containing spare bulbs, of the first-aid kit every year, and replace
Check the inspection plate and have the
valve connector, tyre inflation hose, fire extinguisher tested by an authorised them if necessary.
torch and warning lamp etc.) (option) person if necessary.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 107


At a glance
Tow bar location (option)

Tow bar location (option) Location of spare mirror (option) Emergency hammer (option)
The tow bar is bolted into the left-side
luggage compartment to the rear of the
front axle.

M88_00-0009-01 M86_00-0304-71

There is a replacement mirror (1) in the Pull out emergency hammer (1) with
left-side luggage compartment immedi- the tamper-evident seal from bracket
ately to the rear of the front axle. It is (2).
designed to act as an emergency mirror
The emergency hammer is ready for
only.
use.
Loosen 4 screws (2) to enable you to
remove the mirror.
For “Removing the exterior mirror/fit-
ting the emergency mirror”, refer to the
“Practical advice” section of the Operat- If the vehicle is equipped with an
ing Instructions. electronic anti-theft alarm system
(option), this symbol appears on the
display screen in conjunction with

108 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Emergency hammer (option)

a yellow alert when an emergency


hammer has been removed.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 109


At a glance
Driver's rest area

Driver's rest area

110 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Driver's rest area

1 Ventilation flaps
2 Intercom (connection to the
driver)
3 Interior light
4 Not assigned
5 Not assigned
6 Not assigned
7 Switch for ventilation blower
speed I and II
8 Heating controller

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 111


At a glance
On-board kitchenette refrigerator control panel

On-board kitchenette refrigerator


control panel

112 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
On-board kitchenette refrigerator control panel

1 Refrigerator control panel


2 Display
3 Refrigerator on/off button
4 Refrigerator ON LED
5 Desired temperature selector
buttons
6 Button for activating temper-
ature adjustment

Note:
Press and hold until the de-
sired value currently set is
displayed. Then adjust the
temperature using buttons
(5).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 113


At a glance
Tour guide refrigerator control panel

Tour guide refrigerator control


panel

114 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Tour guide refrigerator control panel

1 Refrigerator on indicator lamp


2 Malfunction lamp
3 Thermostat controller
4 Catch

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 115


At a glance
Windscreen washer reservoir

Windscreen washer reservoir

116 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Seat belt reminder display

1 Windscreen washer reservoir Seat belt reminder display


filler opening
Seat belt reminder display
Note:
The windscreen washer reser-
voir is accessible through a
flap in the front right door-
way. To remove the cover,
loosen the 4 quick-release
locks anti-clockwise.

M54_00-0978-01

With the ignition switched on and the


doors closed, “Fasten seat belts” symbol
(1) on the right-hand side at the front of
the passenger compartment is displayed
for 5 minutes after the bus has pulled
away.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 117


At a glance
Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15 RHD (example of 2-axle bus)

Exterior flaps on the Tourismo 15


RHD (example of 2-axle bus)

118 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


At a glance
Design and function description: fire detection system

1 Spare wheel Design and function description: Operating and malfunction displays:
2 Fuel tank / AdBlue reservoir fire detection system fire detection system
3 Stowage compartment / The main components of the fire detec- Fire detection system malfunction
vehicle tool kit (in 3-axle tion system are the detection agent tank
buses, above the driven axle) and the detection line. The detection
4 Luggage compartment/lavat- agent tank is filled with nitrogen gas and
ory Glysantin. The detection line is connec-
5 Luggage compartment/multi- ted to the detection agent tank. The end
purpose room/driver's rest of the detection line is sealed. The pres- In the event of a fire detection system
area sure (approximately 24 bar) of the de- failure or malfunction, a yellow warn-
6 Auxiliary switch panel (in 3- tection agent tank therefore acts on the ing level malfunction is displayed on the
axle buses, above the trailing detection line at all times. The pressure screen in conjunction with this icon.
axle) of the detection agent tank is monitored
7 Auxiliary heating, stowage by a pressure switch. In the event of a Caution:
compartment fire in the engine compartment, the de- If a yellow warning level malfunction is
8 Radiator, fan tection line melts and the nitrogen gas displayed, it is permissible to drive on
9 Main switch panel and Glysantin escapes from the detec- carefully but the bus should be checked
tion agent tank. The pressure switch on by an OMNIplus Service Partner at the
10 Batteries (in 3-axle buses,
the detection agent tank triggers a warn- earliest opportunity.
above the trailing axle), elec-
trics ing signal that is displayed to the driver
in the form of a fire alarm notification. Fire detection system triggered
11 Luggage compartment
12 Stowage compartment
13 Exhaust system
14 Engine air intake
15 Engine compartment A triggering of the fire detection system
(e.g. due to a fire in the engine compart-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 119


At a glance
Operating and malfunction displays: fire detection system

ment) is indicated by this icon on the


screen in conjunction with a red warning
level malfunction. A signal sounds.

Danger.
Risk of accident. If this alert is displayed,
bring the vehicle to an immediate halt
(road and traffic conditions permitting),
open all the doors and urge the pas-
sengers to disembark. Then operate the
master safety switch and apply the park-
ing brake. Disembark and implement or
arrange further measures.

120 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Table of contents

Rotary light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123


Steering column switch for light and wiper functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Parking brake and emergency release device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Basic settings menu on display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Brightness setting of the display screen and instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Display screen in the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Calling up and interpreting the fuel consumption indicator (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Air suspension safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Normal level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Activating/deactivating axle load transfer for trailing axle (3-axle buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Activating/deactivating the bus stop brake (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Activating/deactivating the drive-off lock (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 121


Driver's area controls
Table of contents

Important information on the steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147


Turning the steering wheel when the bus is stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Activating the attendant call system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

122 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Rotary light switch

Rotary light switch 1 Side lamps 3 Front foglamps (pull switch


combines the following functions: 2 Headlamps: Dipped-beam to 1st detent): In addition
headlamps/main-beam head- to the side lamps, dipped-
lamps (depending on the beam headlamps or main-
steering column switch po- beam headlamps if the igni-
sition) with the ignition switch tion switch has been switched
in position 2 (drive position) to ON. Indicator lamp (3.1)
lights up.
Note: 4 Rear foglamp (pull switch to
2nd detent). In addition to
In countries where traffic
drives on the other side of
the front foglamps. Indicat-
the road to that in the coun- or lamp (4.1) lights up. When
try where the vehicle was a trailer or skibox is connec-
registered, there is a risk ted, the rear foglamp on the
M54_00-1248-71
of oncoming traffic being towing vehicle is disabled and
0 Lights switched off/daytime dazzled by the asymmetric- only the rear foglamp connec-
driving lights switched on al dipped-beam headlamps. ted via the trailer socket is
(country-specific) When driving in these coun- enabled.
tries, observe country-specific
Note: regulations (mask headlamps
if necessary).
Buses with daytime driv-
ing lights (country-specific):
as soon as the engine is
switched on, the side lamps,
the dipped-beam headlamps
and the licence plate lamps
switch on automatically.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 123


Driver's area controls
Steering column switch for light and wiper functions

Steering column switch for light 4 Headlamp flasher: Pull the Steering column switch for retarder
and wiper functions stalk upwards and cruise control (overview)
5 Main-beam and dipped-beam The “General information/Safety pre-
headlamps: Stalk in basic cautions” in the “Driving systems” sec-
position = dipped-beam head- tion of the Operating Instructions must
lamps, stalk down = main- be observed.
beam headlamps
6 Windscreen wipers: Turn the
sleeve on the switch stalk:
speed 0 = off, speed INT = in-
termittent, speed I = normal,
speed II = rapid
7 Wipe and wash: Push sleeve
M54_00-0081-01
on the switch stalk towards
the steering column. With
1 Horn: Press button
windscreen wipers switched
2 Indicate left and right with off = windscreen wipe and
automatic reset: Push the wash
switch stalk beyond the point
of resistance until it clicks
into position.
3 One-touch indicators for a
lane change: Press the switch
stalk only briefly (not beyond
the pressure point). The turn
signals flash five times.

124 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview)

Combined drive/brake cruise 1.2 Tap briefly (< 0.5


control Note: seconds) = current speed is
The speed is maintained constant only set and shown on the display
for as long as the braking performance of screen, or resumption of last
the retarder remains sufficient for this to stored speed.
be possible. If necessary, shift down and
reduce speed. Note:
Tap briefly again (< 0.5
1.1 Tap briefly (< 0.5 seconds) = set speed is
seconds) = current speed is reduced by 0.3 mph (0.5
set and shown on the display km/h).
screen.
Note:
Note:
M54_00-1003-01 Press and hold (> 0.5
Tap briefly again (< 0.5 seconds) = bus speed
seconds) = set speed is reduced until switch released.
Note: increased by 0.3 mph (0.5 When the steering column
Precondition: bus speed must be great- km/h). switch is released, the current
er than 10 mph (15 km/h). The clutch speed is set as the new
and service brake pedals must be fully re- value.
Note:
leased and the continuous brakes must
not be active. Press and hold (> 0.5 1.3 Cruise control is switched
seconds) = bus speed off and the last stored value
increased until switch remains stored in the control
released. When the steering unit (until the ignition switch
column switch is released, the is switched off).
current speed is set as the
new value.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 125


Driver's area controls
Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview)

Variable speed limiter (Temposet) 1.4 Tap briefly = function


Note: changeover to speed
The combined drive/brake limiter (LIM). The function
cruise control is deactivated changeover is indicated by
automatically as soon as the the “LIM” symbol on the
service brake is applied with display screen. If the steering
cruise control operational at column switch (A) is now
this time. moved to position (1.1) or
(1.2), the current speed will
Note: be set as the limit speed. The
If the clutch pedal is de- set value is shown on the
pressed, cruise control will display screen. The driver
remain active when the clutch M54_00-1003-01
must continue to use the
pedal is subsequently re- accelerator pedal.
leased. However, cruise con-
trol will be deactivated if the Note:
clutch is depressed for more
than 5 seconds. A short sig- Press and hold (1.1): the limit
nal sounds to indicate that speed that was set will be
cruise control is in standby increased by increments of 3
mode. mph (5 km/h) for as long as
the switch is pressed.
For detailed operating informa-
tion, refer to “Activating combined
drive/brake cruise control” in the “Driv-
ing systems” section of the Operating
Instructions.

126 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview)

tems” section of the Operating Instruc-


Note: Note: tions.
Press and hold (1.2): the The speed limiter can be ac- Continuous braking
limit speed set will be de- tivated at speeds above 6
creased by increments of 3 mph (10 km/h); between 6
mph (5 km/h) for as long as mph (10 km/h) and 10 mph
the switch is pressed. (15 km/h) it is always lim-
ited to 10 mph (15 km/h).
It is possible to exceed the
Note:
set speed temporarily by de-
To deactivate: combination pressing the accelerator pedal
switch to position 1.3 or beyond the stop (kickdown).
activate cruise control (by If the driver takes his foot
pressing button (1.4)). off the acceleration pedal,
the limit speed set will apply
once more.
M54_00-0082-01

Note: Activating continuous braking:


The retarder is automatic-
ally activated if the set limit Danger.
speed is exceeded by more Do not activate the continuous brake (re-
than 4 km/h in overrun tarder) on a slippery road surface. The
mode. wheels could lock - risk of skidding.

For detailed operating information,


refer to “Activating the variable speed
limiter (Temposet)” in the “Driving sys-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 127


Driver's area controls
Steering column switch for retarder and cruise control (overview)

Engine speed increase


Danger. Danger.
If the accelerator pedal is operated while When the ABS system is working cor-
the continuous brakes are active, the con- rectly, an activated continuous brake
tinuous brakes are deactivated and brak- is automatically deactivated if one or
ing output is reduced to zero. both of the wheels on the driven axle
threatens to lock. If an ABS malfunction
message is present, there is no guarantee
Caution: that this function will be carried out - risk
of skidding.
Always move the combination switch
through each of the available stages to
2.1 - 2.2 Retarder stage 1 - 2
achieve the required braking torque (do
active
not move it directly to the required po- M54_00-0082-01
sition). It is not permitted to move the 2.3 - 2.5 Engine brake, con-
combination switch directly to the re- stantly open throttle, retarder Precondition: bus stationary, engine run-
quired position except in an emergency. stages 3 and 4 active ning.
However, it is acceptable to skip sever- 1.1 The engine speed can be
al stages at once if you are reducing the Note: increased up to a maximum
braking torque. For the optimum braking of 750 rpm.
The interaction between the
torque to be achieved, the engine should 1.3 Engine speed increase off,
engine brake and the con-
be turning within its upper speed range
stantly open throttle valve normal idling speed
so that the coolant does not overheat.
depends on the brake torque
currently available.

128 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Adjustable steering column

Adjustable steering column Ignition switch


Set the steering column to the release Note:
position by pressing the lower section of The steering column is automatically Danger.
pushbutton (1). locked in place if pushbutton (1) is not
pressed for approximately 12 (+/- 5) Never lock the steering while the bus is
seconds. in motion.
Danger.
Do not make adjustments unless the bus
is stationary. Lock the steering column in Danger.
place after you have adjusted the steering Whenever you disembark, even for a short
wheel to match the driver's requirements. time, always remove the key so that the
To do this, press the upper section of bus cannot be started by children or oth-
pushbutton (1). er unauthorised persons.

Danger.
After the adjustable steering column has
been adjusted, the driver must check that
all instruments and indicator lamps are M46_00-0030-01
still visible.

M54_00-0083-01

0 Rest position:

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 129


Driver's area controls
Parking brake and emergency release device

Parking brake and emergency


Note: release device Caution:
Insert or remove the key in Parking brake valve (1) combined with Do not apply the parking brake unless the
this position; the side lamps the emergency release device for spring bus is stationary.
can be switched on. actuators
1 Steering unlocked
Danger.
Caution:
Note: The parking brake spring actuators require Always apply the parking brake before
Selected consumer units can a release pressure of 5.8 to 6.4 bar. At you leave the driver's area.
be switched on. low supply pressures, there is a risk that
2 Drive position/ignition ON the brake may not be fully released, that
the friction pads may make slight contact Danger.
3 Starting position while the bus is in motion and that the
Check the hand lever for full engagement.
brake may be subjected to unnecessarily
high thermal loads. The relevant icon on
the screen must go out when the parking
brake is released. If the compressed-air Note:
system for the parking brake is damaged, An audible warning sounds if the ignition
it is possible to release the parking brake is switched off without the parking brake
using the emergency release device: the engaged.
emergency release device is combined
with the parking brake valve and is op-
erated in exactly the same way as the
normal parking brake. The valve auto-
matically switches over to the air reserve
for the emergency release device and the
spring actuators are released.

130 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Basic settings menu on display screen

Basic settings menu on display


Danger. screen
The braking effect of ABS is cancelled
if you apply the parking brake while the Note:
vehicle is in motion.
In the menu described below, it is pos-
sible to change the basic value for the
display screen illumination and instrument
lighting with the driving lights switched
on, the volume of the turn signal buzzer,
and the language setting for the display
screen.
M54_00-0876-01
Switch the ignition starter switch to Wait for the basic screen to appear.
ON.
Note:
Note: Acknowledge any malfunction alerts that
The parking brake must be applied. might appear by pressing “Quit” button
M42_00-0444-01
(10).
For notes on safety and operation, Turn the rotary light switch to head-
refer to the “Operation” section of the lamps. Press “Info” button (10).
Operating Instructions. The screen display shown appears.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 131


Driver's area controls
Brightness setting of the display screen and instrument lighting

Confirm by pressing button (12). Brightness setting of the display


Note: Exit the settings menu by pressing screen and instrument lighting
A = Display screen or instrument lighting the “Quit” button (10).
basic value with driving lights ON Note:
Night or daytime brightness is set de-
pending on the position of the rotary light
Note: switch.
B = Turn signal buzzer volume

Note:
Note: The values set are automatically stored
C = Display screen language selection when button (24) is released.

Select the setting you wish to change Switch the ignition starter switch to
by pressing “Info” button (12). ON.

Note:
The corresponding symbol appears in
green.

Change the setting by pressing but-


ton - (9) or + (11).

132 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

Display screen in the instrument To hold/scroll screen display


cluster

M54.00-2207-71

Press and hold button (24). M68_00-0125-01

The display screen illumination and M68_00-0216-71 When the lower section of display con-
instrument lighting are dimmed. The screen (1) is active at all times while trol pushbutton (1) is pressed, the oper-
the ignition starter switch is ON. The ating, service and malfunction displays
Press button (24) briefly.
screen is a status indicator for showing are retrieved in sequence (exception: red
The display screen illumination and operating and malfunction information warning level malfunction). When the
instrument lighting are immediately (icons). Additionally, it can be used to upper section of display control push-
set to maximum brightness. display on-board diagnostics information. button (1) is pressed, the current dis-
play mode is held. No other message
will be displayed except for red warn-
ing level malfunctions. The information
shown on the screen is, however, peri-
odically refreshed. A diamond symbol in
the top right corner of the screen indic-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 133


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

ates that the screen is being held. Press operating displays appear straight away overview, otherwise the screen display
either the lower or upper section of the (see illustration). switches over to the yellow warning level
pushbutton again to allow the screen to malfunction overview after approximately
display the next display menu. Red warning level malfunction 5 seconds.
overview
Screen sequence at start-up
Danger.
In the event of a red warning level mal-
function, the bus must be stopped imme-
diately (traffic conditions permitting) and
an OMNIplus Service Partner must be no-
tified.

M54.00-2063-71
M54.00-2062-71 The red warning level malfunction
Whenever the ignition starter switch is overview is indicated by a flashing red
switched to ON, the red warning level warning level malfunction lamp (3). Any
malfunction overview appears on the red warning level malfunctions that
screen first, followed by the yellow are present are indicated by means
warning level malfunction overview and of separate operating and malfunction
then by the service overview. If, during symbols (icons) (1). If there are no red
the start-up, there are no malfunctions warning level malfunctions, the screen
present or services due, this stage display immediately switches over to
is skipped and the supply pressure the yellow warning level malfunction

134 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

Yellow warning level malfunction service tasks that are due are indicated
overview Caution: by means of individual icons (1). If no
In the event of a yellow warning level service tasks are due, the screen dis-
malfunction, it is permissible to drive on play immediately switches to the supply
carefully but the bus should be checked pressure operating display.
by an OMNIplus Service Partner at the
earliest opportunity. Compressed-air supply pressure
operating displays
Service notifications

M54.00-2064-71

The yellow warning level malfunction


overview is indicated by a flashing yellow
warning level malfunction lamp (4). Any
yellow warning level malfunctions that
are present are indicated by means of M54.00-2066-71
separate operating and malfunction sym-
M54.00-2065-71 The supply pressure (0 to 12 bar) for
bols (icons) (1). If there are no yellow
Service notifications generally inform the circuits 1 (front axle or trailing axle), 2
warning level malfunctions, the screen
driver that service products need to be (driven axle) and 3 (auxiliary consumers)
display immediately switches over to the
replenished or wear parts need to be is displayed. If there is sufficient sup-
service overview, otherwise the screen
replaced. In the event of a service noti- ply pressure in all circuits, the screen
display switches over to the service over-
fication, the status indicator at the top display changes to the engine operating
view after approximately 5 seconds.
right of the display screen lights up. Any display after approximately 5 seconds

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 135


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

and the audible warning ceases. If the tank and battery operating display. If the Battery/supply tank operating
sensor signal is faulty, the screen dis- sensor signal is faulty, the screen dis- display
plays toggle between the minimum and plays toggle between the minimum and
maximum value in a 1 second cycle. maximum value in a 1 second cycle.

Danger. Note:
The bus must not be driven until the aud- The engine oil pressure should be higher
ible warning has ceased. than 0.5 bar at idling speed and higher
than 2 bar when the bus is being driv-
Engine operating displays en. A negative value (-) for the engine oil
level indicates that the oil level needs to
be topped up.

M54.00-2068-71

AdBlue additive supply (1) (empty 0 to


full 1/1) and battery voltage (2) (0 to
32 V) are displayed. After approximately
5 seconds, the screen display changes
to the Driving operating display. If the
sensor signal is faulty, the screen dis-
plays toggle between the minimum and
M54.00-2067-71 maximum value in a 1 second cycle.
Engine oil pressure (1) (between 0 and
6 bar) and engine oil level (2) are dis-
played. After approximately 5 seconds,
the screen display changes to the fuel

136 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

Fuel consumption indicator (option) Driving operating display


Note:
An icon appears on the basic screen
when the level in the AdBlue supply tank
has fallen to 33% of capacity.

Note:
The battery voltage display should show
25 - 28 V when the engine is running. If
this is not the case, you should visit an
OMNIplus Service Partner as a matter of
urgency.
M54.00-2069-71 M54.00-2070-71

Different measured values and calculated This is the basic screen normally shown
average values are shown in the fuel when the bus is being driven, but also
consumption indicator (option) in zone A when stationary. In this display mode, all
(values since start) and B (values since items of bus operating information are
reset). represented as symbols (icons).

Note: Note:
For more detailed information, refer to Outside temperature (1) is shown on each
“Calling up and interpreting the fuel con- screen.
sumption indicator” in the “Driver's area
controls” section of the Operating Instruc-
tions.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 137


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

symbol (icon) associated with this mal- Red warning level malfunction
Danger. function is displayed in the centre of lamp (continued)
the screen. At the same time, a signal
RISK OF ACCIDENT. If the temperature
display shows a temperature of around sounds and red warning level malfunc-
freezing point (0 °C), the road surface tion lamp (3) flashes.
may be icy, especially in areas protected
from the sun and on bridges. Following a Danger.
sudden change in temperature, e.g. after
driving out of a depot, an accurate tem- In the event of a red warning level mal-
perature reading will be displayed only function, the bus must be stopped imme-
after a delay. diately (traffic conditions permitting) and
an OMNIplus Service Partner must be no-
Red warning level malfunction tified.

M54.00-2207-71

The malfunction can be acknowledged


by pressing Quit button (21), but only
if the bus is stationary and the parking
brake is applied. The red warning level
malfunction display is then faded into
the background. This frees the screen
for other messages to be displayed or
queries to be made. A lit red warning
level malfunction lamp (3) indicates that
M54.00-2071-71 there are red warning level malfunctions
With the first occurrence of a red warn- present but they are not currently being
ing level malfunction, the malfunction displayed on the screen.

138 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Display screen in the instrument cluster

Yellow warning level malfunction lamp (4) indicates that there are yellow
Caution: warning level malfunctions present but
In the event of a yellow warning level they are not currently being displayed on
malfunction, it is permissible to drive on the screen.
carefully but the bus should be checked
by an OMNIplus Service Partner at the
earliest opportunity.

Yellow alert in the background

M54.00-2072-71

With the first occurrence of a yellow


warning level malfunction, the malfunc-
tion symbol (icon) associated with this
malfunction is displayed in the centre of
the screen. At the same time, a signal
sounds and yellow warning level malfunc-
tion lamp (4) flashes.
M54.00-2115-71

The yellow warning level malfunction dis-


play is faded into the background auto-
matically after approximately 5 seconds.
This frees the screen for other messages
to be displayed or queries to be made.
A lit yellow warning level malfunction

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 139


Driver's area controls
Calling up and interpreting the fuel consumption indicator (option)

Calling up and interpreting the fuel


consumption indicator (option) Note: Note:
When the bus is stationary and the park- Press and hold the upper section of the
ing brake is applied, the display can also display control pushbutton as soon as the
be changed using the “Quit” button below indicator appears on the display screen.
the display screen. Otherwise, the display changes to the
Driving operating display automatically
after 10 seconds.

Note:
When the bus is stationary and the park-
ing brake is applied, the screen display
can also be held using “Info” button (11)
M68_00-0125-01
below the display screen.
To call up the fuel consumption indic-
ator: Interpreting the display (after start):

Note: M54.00-2069-71 Note:


Press the lower section of display control To hold (freeze) the fuel consumption The upper area of the display screen (A)
pushbutton (1) several times until the fuel indicator: shows various measured values since the
consumption indicator appears. last start:

140 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Calling up and interpreting the fuel consumption indicator (option)

Note: Note: Note:


1 = Distance covered since start 5 = Distance covered since reset The upper area of the display (after start)
can be reset by briefly pressing “Re-
set” button (10) in the selected fuel con-
Note: Note: sumption menu or by leaving the ignition
starter switch switched to OFF for more
2 = Driving time since start 6 = Driving time since reset than 4 hours.

Note: Note: Note:


3 = Average speed since start 7 = Average speed since reset The lower area of the display (since re-
set) can be reset by pressing and hold-
ing “Reset” button (10) in the selected
Note: Note: fuel consumption menu (for more than 3
4 = Average fuel consumption since start 8 = Average fuel consumption since reset seconds).

Interpreting the display (since reset): Resetting both areas of the display

Note: Note:
The lower area of the display screen (B) For safety reasons, the displays cannot be
shows various measured values since the reset unless the bus is stationary and the
last time the “Reset” button was pressed: parking brake is applied.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 141


Driver's area controls
Air suspension safety precautions

Air suspension safety precautions Raising/lowering the bus


The forward section of the chassis and Danger. Preconditions: ignition switch ON,
the guidance of the driven axle have Although the bus remains manoeuvrable bus stationary, doors closed, operat-
been structurally designed in such a way while the suspension is depressurised, ing pressure > 6.5 bar, level control
as to ensure that the bus remains man- it must be driven no faster than walking operational.
oeuvrable when the suspension air bags pace to the nearest lay-by or OMNIplus
Raise or lower the bus using the
have been depressurised. Service Partner. Whenever work is carried
out on the air suspension system, the
pushbutton.
In this condition, the full weight of the body must always be supported by jacks
vehicle body is supported by the stop and stands positioned at the designated
buffers fitted at the forward section of points because the body of the bus could
the chassis and at the rear axle. These drop relatively quickly in the event of a
stop buffers are unladen when the sus- loss of air.
pension is at normal level and are in-
tended only to prevent the body of the Danger.
vehicle from dropping onto the axle in The bus must not be lowered if there are
the event of extreme suspension com- persons present in the immediate vicinity
pression. The stop buffers are not de- of the bus.
signed for permanent loading and cannot
be used as a replacement for the normal
suspension under any circumstances. Danger.
The bodywork could otherwise suffer Do not exceed the maximum permissible
damage (cracks, etc.). vehicle height when driving with the bus
raised above normal level. In Germany,
the maximum permissible vehicle height
is limited to 4 metres. Observe local na-
tional regulations if the bus is operated in
other countries.

142 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Normal level

Normal level
Danger. Note: Preconditions: ignition switch ON,
The bus is not permitted to be driven As raising the bus increases the approach bus stationary, doors closed, operat-
faster than walking pace whenever it angle, it is advisable to raise the bus ing pressure > 6.5 bar, level control
has been raised or lowered out of nor- above normal level on parts of journeys operational.
mal level. involving numerous hairpin bends, for ex-
ample. Press the pushbutton to return the
bus to normal level.
Note:
Note:
The suspension air bags are deflated or
inflated and the superstructure is lowered The corresponding symbol appears on the
or raised by 70 mm respectively. instrument cluster display screen whenev-
er the bus has been raised or lowered.

The bus is lowered or raised for as Note:


Note: Bus normal level (driving position).
long as the pushbutton is pressed.
It is possible to raise or lower the bus
only at speeds of up to 12 mph (20
km/h).

Note:
The bus returns to normal level as soon
as its speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 143


Driver's area controls
Activating/deactivating axle load transfer for trailing axle (3-axle buses only)

Activating/deactivating axle load


transfer for trailing axle (3-axle Note: Note:
buses only) After the axle load transfer has been ac- The pull-away aid will be cancelled if the
tivated, the compressed-air supply to the air pressure in the suspension air bags
suspension air bags for the trailing axle is of the driven axle exceeds 7 bar while
stopped. An overflow valve deflates the the bus is in motion and the axle load
suspension air bags. relief function is active. The suspension
air bags are again under an equal loading.

Note:
The pull-away aid cannot be activated Note:
unless the ignition switch is ON and the The pull-away aid similarly switches off if
bus is travelling at a speed of below 20 the speed of the bus exceeds 20 mph (30
mph (30 km/h). km/h).
M32_00-0182-71

The axle load transfer of the trailing


axle is activated by pressing pushbut-
ton (1) in the driver's area.
When the pull-away aid is active, the
LED lights up in the pushbutton and
Note: the “Pull-away aid active” symbol
The axle load transfer (pull-away aid) is appears on the screen.
primarily used in the winter for pulling
away or for reversing in wintry road con- Press rocker switch (1) again to
ditions. The compression force on the switch off the pull-away aid.
driven axle is increased because the load
on the trailing axle is reduced.

144 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Activating/deactivating the bus stop brake (option)

Activating/deactivating the bus


stop brake (option) Note:
Ignition starter switch ON The “Ready to depart” icon appears on
The wheels on the driven axle are the display screen at the same time.
Danger. braked with reduced pressure. Depress the accelerator pedal.
Do not activate the bus stop brake unless The “bus stop brake” function is de-
the bus is stationary. The bus stop brake Danger.
activated again and the icons on the
must not be used as a means to brake
If the parking brake is subsequently ap- display screen go out.
a coasting bus to a halt. The bus must
plied, the bus stop brake will be released.
never be parked with only the bus stop
After the parking brake is released again,
brake applied. Apply the parking brake Note:
the bus stop brake will be reactivated
at bus stops on steep uphill or downhill
after a delay. For this reason, it is es- The bus stop brake is also deactivated if
gradients that exceed 15 %.
sential that the service brake be applied you apply the parking brake or switch the
during this time. ignition starter switch to OFF.

Danger.
Always apply the parking brake correctly Note:
before you leave the driver's area. The icon above appears on the instrument
cluster display screen.
Press the bus stop brake pushbutton.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 145


Driver's area controls
Activating/deactivating the drive-off lock (option)

Activating/deactivating the drive-off of 2.0 bar, the engine runs at idling


lock (option) speed, and it is not possible to alter Note:
Ignition switched on the engine speed using the accelerat- The drive-off lock is also deactivated if
or pedal. you apply the parking brake or switch off
Bus stationary
the ignition.
Note:
Danger.
This icon appears on the instrument
If the drive-off lock is not used as inten- cluster display screen.
ded, the vehicle could roll away. This
could result in an accident with serious or Close all passenger doors.
fatal injuries. Therefore: - Always apply
the parking brake before you start/stop
the engine or leave the driver's area. -
Do not, under any circumstances, use the
drive-off lock to park the bus or to secure
the bus against rolling away. - Apply the
parking brake when stopping on steep up-
hill or downhill gradients exceeding 15 % Note:
or at bus stops on steep uphill or down-
The “ready to depart” icon is shown on
hill gradients exceeding 15 %.
the display screen.
One or both passenger doors open. Depress the accelerator pedal.
The drive-off lock is released as
soon as the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed. Both icons on the display
All wheel brakes are applied automat- screen go out.
ically with a compressed-air pressure

146 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver's area controls
Important information on the steering system

Important information on the Since there is an extremely low probab- Turning the steering wheel when
steering system ility of this situation occurring - but if it the bus is stationary
The dimensions of the steering system does occur, it often does so completely Adhere to the instructions.
and the mechanical steering transmis- unexpectedly - the driver could wrongly
sion ratio were designed such that, assume that the steering system has
been blocked. However, the bus does Note:
in the event of a malfunction in the
remain steerable provided the driver ap- To prevent damage to the steering
hydraulic power steering system, the
plies the necessary force. column, the following points must be
effort required to turn the steering observed when turning the steering wheel
wheel would not exceed a specific This important information is intended to with the bus stationary, without hydraulic
value deemed by legislators to be the clarify the scenario described and pre- support (engine switched off) and without
maximum reasonable force. vent the driver from possibly misjudging a turntable under the front wheels (tyres
For vehicles weighing over 12 t, this the situation. in direct contact with the ground):
maximum operating force is 450 N (400 Release the steering wheel adjuster
N for vehicles between 3.5 t and 12 t) Danger.
and push the steering wheel fully
applied to the steering wheel rim in the In the event of a power steering failure, down. Lock the steering wheel ad-
straight-ahead position. This force must the bus becomes very difficult to steer. juster in place. Turn the steering
be sufficient to achieve a turning circle Have the malfunction rectified immedi- wheel using both hands at an angle
with a radius of 20 m at a road speed of ately by an OMNIplus Service Partner.
of 90° to 180° to one another.
approximately 10 km/h.
The driver must be aware that, in the
Caution:
event of a sudden failure in the power
steering (e.g. due to a pump drive mal- Never have more than one person turn
the steering wheel. Do not pull the steer-
function), the bus will remain steerable
ing wheel on one side only.
but considerably more effort will be re-
quired.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 147


Driver's area controls
Activating the attendant call system

Activating the attendant call system


Note: Press the attendant call system
We ask the workshop in particular to note switch with the ignition switched on.
this.

The LED in the switch lights up.

An icon now appears on the instru-


ment cluster display screen whenever
the attendant call button on the ser-
vice set above one of the passenger
seats is pressed.

Note:
A red LED on this seat's service set lights
up.

148 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Table of contents

Master safety switch (emergency-off switch) (national variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152


Mirror adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Windscreen roller sunblind pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Pushbutton for co-driver's roller sunblind (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Axle load transfer switch (3-axle buses only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Diesel particulate filter (DPF) regeneration start/inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) OFF pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Pushbutton for GO 240-8 transmission shift system failsafe mode (option) (2/4 and N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Pushbutton for GO 240-8 transmission shift system failsafe mode (option) (activation of failsafe mode
and R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creep mode pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Display control pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Driver's area lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ADR pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Reading lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Passenger-compartment lighting switch positions I+II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 149


Switch descriptions
Table of contents

Night lighting switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158


Roof hatch pushbutton - air in/air out (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Attendant call system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
“School bus operation” pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Audible reverse warning feature switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Driver's power window pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Pushbutton for raising/lowering the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Normal-level pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Passenger stop request system enabling switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Switch for the driver's window heating/mirror heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Windscreen heating switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Horn changeover switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Central locking pushbutton for the left-side luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Central locking pushbutton for the right-side luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Kitchenette enabling switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Lavatory enabling switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

150 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Table of contents

Switch for electrical circuits > 100 V (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164


Seat microphone switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Pushbutton for hanging up the intercom (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Selection pushbutton for intercom in the driver's rest area/kitchenette (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Switch for deactivating pedal-activated continuous braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Bus stop brake pushbutton (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Hazard warning lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Door I pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Door II pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Bus stop brake emergency release switch (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
ADR button (accident data recorder) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 151


Switch descriptions
Master safety switch (emergency-off switch) (national variant)

Master safety switch (emergency-


off switch) (national variant) Note: Note:
When master safety switch (1) is op- Additional functions may be available, de- In Poland, the hazard warning lamps are
erated, the engine is switched off if pending on the national variant. switched on automatically.
running. The tachograph, instrument
cluster (option), interior lighting and roof
hatches remain operational. Operate the Note: Note:
emergency-off switch by pressing the red In Finland, Greece, Spain and Italy, the In Austria, operating the emergency-off
knob. Unlock the switch by turning the hazard warning lamps and interior light- switch switches off the engine and inter-
red knob anti-clockwise. ing are switched on automatically. The rupts the supply of power to the entire
central locking is enabled (ECE-R 36). electrical system.

Danger.
Risk of accident. The emergency-off Note:
switch should not be operated except
In France, the hazard warning lamps are
in an emergency and only with the bus
enabled.
stationary - never while the bus is in
motion. Operation of the emergency-off
switch causes the engine to switch
off automatically. The power steering Note:
would consequently be disabled if the In Norway, the hazard warning lamps,
bus were in motion. Additional effort interior lighting, auxiliary heating (water
would then be required in order to steer. heater) and horn are enabled.
Furthermore, the power supply to all
important electrical consumers (e.g. bus M54_00-0986-01
lighting, ABS, electronic transmission shift
system, etc.) would be interrupted. The
roadworthiness of the bus is at risk.

152 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Mirror adjuster

Mirror adjuster Windscreen roller sunblind pushbut- Pushbutton for co-driver's roller
Using this control element, it is possible ton (option) sunblind (option)
to change the position of the left or right The pushbutton is used to raise or lower The pushbutton is used to raise or lower
exterior mirror. Which mirror is adjusted the roller sunblind. The roller sunblind is the roller sunblind. The roller sunblind is
depends on the position of adjustment active only for as long as the pushbutton active only for as long as the pushbutton
button (1). is pressed. is pressed.

M68_00-0146-01

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 153


Switch descriptions
Axle load transfer switch (3-axle buses only)

Axle load transfer switch (3-axle Diesel particulate filter (DPF) Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
buses only) regeneration start/inhibit OFF pushbutton
Pressing the pushbutton on the instru- Upper section of pushbutton pressed: This pushbutton deactivates the ESP
ment panel activates the axle load trans- Start DPF regeneration. Press lower sec- function. The dynamic handling control
fer of the 3rd axle provided the bus is tion of pushbutton: Stop DPF regenera- (FDR) and acceleration skid control (ASR)
travelling at a speed of below 30 km/h. tion or inhibit automatic DPF regenera- functions are also disabled. This is indic-
If the axle load transfer is already active, tion. ated on the screen by a crossed-through
pressing the pushbutton deactivates the ESP symbol. Pressing the pushbutton
function. If active, the axle load transfer again or switching the ignition starter
will be deactivated automatically as soon switch to OFF and back to ON reactiv-
as the bus is travelling faster than 30 ates the function.
km/h. A symbol on the screen and an
LED in the pushbutton indicate whether
the axle load transfer is active.

For notes on safety and operation,


refer to the “Operation” section of the
Operating Instructions.
For notes on safety and operation,
refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-
tion of the Operating Instructions.

154 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Pushbutton for GO 240-8 transmission shift system failsafe mode (option) (2/4 and N)

Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans- Pushbutton for GO 240-8 trans- Creep mode pushbutton
mission shift system failsafe mode mission shift system failsafe mode Upper section of pushbutton pressed =
(option) (2/4 and N) (option) (activation of failsafe mode creep mode deactivated.
While failsafe mode (option) is active, and R)
this pushbutton is used to request the This pushbutton is used to activate Note:
gears that are available or to shift the failsafe mode (option) or, if failsafe mode
The creep function enables the vehicle
transmission to neutral. is already active, to shift into reverse
to creep forwards independently when
gear. the service brake is released with the en-
gine idling without the driver having to
use the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
crawls along at idling speed until the
driver uses the service brake to stop or
For notes on safety and operation,
until the creep function is deactivated/
refer to the “Transmission shift systems” For notes on safety and operation, cancelled.
section. refer to the “Transmission shift systems”
section.
Note:
The creep function is available at all times
after an engine start and is activated
after the vehicle has pulled away for the
first time. Using the pushbutton, it is pos-
sible to deactivate this function in ex-
actly the same way as it would be in the
display screen menu if this menu is cur-
rently unavailable for some reason, such
as when the screen is displaying camera
images.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 155


Switch descriptions
Display control pushbutton

Display control pushbutton Driver's area lighting switch


Causes the screen display to change or With the ignition starter switch switched
freezes the screen display ON, the driver's area lighting can be
switched on and off.
Note:
Press lower section: scroll through screen
displays.

Note:
Press upper section: hold current screen
display.

156 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
ADR pushbutton

ADR pushbutton Reading lamps switch Passenger-compartment lighting


This pushbutton is used to switch on the With the switch in position 1 (down), the switch positions I+II
accident data recorder (ADR). driver can switch on the reading lamps With the switch in position 1 (down), all
as additional lighting for the vehicle of the interior lighting can be switched
interior provided the ignition starter on provided the ignition starter switch
switch has been switched to ON and has been switched to ON and economy
economy mode is not active. All the mode is not active. If the ignition starter
reading lamps are then switched on. switch is OFF, however, it is the night
With the switch in position 2 (up), the lighting that will be switched on, even
driver can enable the reading lamps for if economy mode is active. With the
passengers provided the conditions de- switch in position 2 (up) and the ignition
scribed above have been fulfilled and, starter switch ON, the night lighting can
in addition, the side lamps have been be switched on even if economy mode is
switched on. active.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 157


Switch descriptions
Night lighting switch

Night lighting switch Roof hatch pushbutton - air in/air


Using this switch, it is possible to switch out (option) Danger.
on the LED night lighting provided the It is possible to move the front and rear Do not operate the roof hatches unless
side lamps are switched on. roof hatches individually to either the you are sure that no persons are present
air-in or air-out position using the double in the area around the hatches. There is
rocker switch provided the roof hatches a risk of injury and entrapment if parts
have not been forced closed by air-con- of the body (fingers) are in the area of
movement of the roof hatches.
ditioning or “smog” mode and the wind-
screen wipers are not operating at speed
1 or 2. When the roof hatches are open,
the indicator lamp in the switch lights up
and a corresponding operating symbol
(icon) is shown on the display screen.
If the upper section of the pushbutton
is pressed only briefly, the roof hatch
moves to the air-in position. The roof
hatch opens fully if the upper section
of the pushbutton is pressed for longer
than 1 second. If the lower section of
the pushbutton is pressed only briefly,
the roof hatch moves to the air-out pos-
ition. The roof hatch closes if the lower
section of the pushbutton is pressed for
longer than 1 second.

158 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Attendant call system switch

Attendant call system switch “School bus operation” pushbutton Audible reverse warning feature
Switches on the power supply for the (option) switch (option)
attendant call function. A lamp in the Pressing this pushbutton switches on This switch is used to switch off the aud-
switch lights up when the switch is all the turn signals on the left and right. ible reverse warning that would normally
pressed. An operating symbol (icon) The school bus warning lights can be sound when reverse gear is engaged.
appears on the instrument cluster deactivated using the school bus warn-
display screen whenever the attendant ing lights pushbutton or the turn signal
call button at one of the passenger seats switch on the steering column (indicate
is pressed. At the same time, a red LED left or right).
on this seat's service set lights up.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 159


Switch descriptions
Driver's power window pushbutton

Driver's power window pushbutton Pushbutton for raising/lowering the Normal-level pushbutton
The driver's window can be opened or bus Pressing this pushbutton returns the bus
closed. The power window is active only The bus is raised or lowered when the to normal level.
for as long as the pushbutton is pressed. pushbutton is pressed.

Danger.
The window's range of movement should
be kept clear of all obstructions (e.g. any For notes on safety and operation,
part of your body) while the pushbutton is For notes on safety and operation, refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-
being pressed (particularly during closing). refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec- tion.
tion.

160 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Passenger stop request system enabling switch

Passenger stop request system Switch for the driver's window


enabling switch heating/mirror heating
This switch is used to disable the pas- The heating for the driver's window and
senger stop request system. The deac- mirrors can be switched on using this
tivation is indicated by a corresponding pushbutton provided the ignition starter
icon on the instrument cluster display switch has been switched to ON and
screen. economy mode is not active. The indic-
ator lamp in the switch lights up at the
same time. The heating for the driver-
's window and mirrors cannot be re-
started until the switch-off delay (30
minutes) has elapsed. Switching the ig-
nition starter switch to OFF cancels the
switch-off delay, and the heating for the
driver's window and mirrors switches off
immediately. If the economy function
is activated during the switch-off delay,
the heating for the driver's window and
mirrors will be switched off only for the
duration of the economy period. If the
switch-off delay has not elapsed by the
time the economy function is deactiv-
ated, the heating for the driver's window
and mirrors switches back on for the
period of time remaining.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 161


Switch descriptions
Windscreen heating switch (option)

Windscreen heating switch (option) Horn changeover switch (option) Central locking pushbutton for the
The windscreen heating can be switched Changeover between horn 1 (top/elec- left-side luggage compartment
on using this pushbutton provided tric)/horn 2 (bottom/air) The luggage compartment flaps can be
the ignition starter switch has been locked or unlocked electropneumatically
switched to ON and economy mode using the rocker switch provided the ig-
is not active. The indicator lamp in nition starter switch has been switched
the switch lights up at the same time. to ON. The luggage compartment light-
The windscreen heating cannot be ing switches on automatically provided
restarted until the switch-off delay (30 the luggage compartment flap circuit
minutes) has elapsed. Operating the on one side of the bus is unlocked and
master safety switch or switching the one of the luggage compartment flaps
ignition starter switch to OFF cancels is open. The LED in the rocker switch
the switch-off delay, and the windscreen provides the driver with a confirmation
heating switches off immediately. If the of the state. LED lit -> luggage compart-
economy function is activated during the ment flaps unlocked.
switch-off delay, the windscreen heating
will be switched off only for the duration
of the economy period. If the switch-off
delay has not elapsed by the time the
economy function is deactivated, the
windscreen heating switches back on for
the period of time remaining.

162 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Central locking pushbutton for the right-side luggage compartment

Central locking pushbutton for the Kitchenette enabling switch (option) Lavatory enabling switch (option)
right-side luggage compartment With the kitchenette enabled, it is pos- All functions in the lavatory cabin are
The luggage compartment flaps can be sible to use the water supply, the light- available when the lavatory cabin has
locked or unlocked electropneumatically ing and selected basic functions. been enabled.
using the rocker switch provided the ig-
nition starter switch has been switched
to ON. The luggage compartment light-
ing switches on automatically provided
the luggage compartment flap circuit For notes on safety and operation, For notes on safety and operation,
on one side of the bus is unlocked and refer to the “On-board kitchenette” sec- refer to the “Lavatory” section of the
one of the luggage compartment flaps tion of the Operating Instructions. Operating Instructions.
is open. The LED in the rocker switch
provides the driver with a confirmation
of the state. LED lit -> luggage compart-
ment flaps unlocked.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 163


Switch descriptions
Switch for electrical circuits > 100 V (option)

Switch for electrical circuits > 100 Seat microphone switch Pushbutton for hanging up the
V (option) This switch activates the microphone intercom (option)
Using this pushbutton, it is possible to at the driver's seat to enable the driver This pushbutton is available only in con-
isolate electrical circuits with an effective to speak to passengers through the PA junction with the selection pushbutton
voltage of over 100 V from the main system. for the intercom in the driver's rest
power supply circuit. area/kitchenette (option). Pressing the
upper section of the pushbutton ends
the call connection with the intercom
in the driver's rest area or on-board kit-
chenette.
Observe the safety and operating in-
formation in the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions.

164 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Selection pushbutton for intercom in the driver's rest area/kitchenette (option)

Selection pushbutton for intercom Switch for deactivating pedal-


in the driver's rest area/kitchenette Danger. activated continuous braking
(option) Please devote your attention primarily to None of the continuous brakes available
When the lower section of the pushbut- road and traffic conditions. in the bus (retarder, engine brake, con-
ton is pressed, a ring tone sounds at the stantly open throttle) will be activated
intercom in the on-board kitchenette. in addition to the service brake when
The LED in the pushbutton lights up at Danger. the driver depresses the brake pedal. A
the same time. Once the handset has Do not use the intercom unless road and notification (icon) showing the crossed-
been picked up, it is possible to speak traffic conditions permit you to do so through “continuous brake” symbol then
to the person in the on-board kitchenette safely. Please bear in mind that your bus appears in the screen's basic menu.
using the swan-neck microphone re- will cover a distance of 14 metres every
gardless of whether the microphone is second at a speed of only 50 km/h. Note:
already switched on or not. The voice of
This switch is for use mainly in wintry
the person in the on-board kitchenette is
road conditions so that the driver can
heard over the two front loudspeakers. moderate the braking effect more effect-
When the upper section of the pushbut- ively.
ton is pressed, a ring tone sounds at the
intercom in the driver's rest area and the
LED in the pushbutton lights up. Once
the receiver has been picked up, a con-
versation can be held in the same way.
When you have finished your conversa-
tion, you should always press the upper
section of the intercom pushbutton, oth-
erwise the radio will remain muted. The
LED in the pushbutton must go out.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 165


Switch descriptions
Bus stop brake pushbutton (option)

Bus stop brake pushbutton (option) Hazard warning lamps switch


When the pushbutton is pressed, all Danger. All the turn signals on the left and right
wheel brakes are applied with reduced Do not under any circumstances use the are switched on regardless of the pos-
pressure. It is prohibited to activate the bus stop brake as a parking brake or hill- ition of the ignition starter switch. The
bus stop brake unless the bus is station- holder. - Apply the parking brake whenev- turn signal indicator in the hazard warn-
ary. er you come to a stop on a steep uphill ing lamps switch flashes and the green
or downhill gradient of more than 15 % turn signal indicator lamps in the instru-
or pull into a bus stop on a steep uphill
Danger. ment cluster flash.
or downhill gradient of more than 15 %. -
If the bus stop brake is not used as in- Do not activate the bus stop brake unless
tended, the vehicle could roll away. This the vehicle is stationary.
could result in an accident with seri-
ous or fatal injuries. Therefore: - Al-
ways apply the parking brake before you
start/stop the engine or leave the driver's
area (refer to the “Driver's area controls”
section of the Operating Instructions).
For notes on safety and operation,
refer to the “Driver's area controls” sec-
tion of the Operating Instructions.

166 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Switch descriptions
Door I pushbutton

Door I pushbutton Door II pushbutton Bus stop brake emergency release


The driver's pushbutton opens or closes The driver's pushbutton opens or closes switch (option)
the front right door. The bus must be the centre right door. The bus must be This switch is used to release the bus
stationary for the door to open. The stationary for the door to open. The stop brake in an emergency or in the
open state is displayed to the driver by open state is displayed to the driver by event of a malfunction.
an indicator lamp in the driver's push- an indicator lamp in the driver's push-
button and a corresponding icon on the button and a corresponding icon on the Danger.
instrument cluster display screen. instrument cluster display screen.
This switch has a tamper-evident seal and
is intended to be operated only in the
event of a malfunction in the bus stop
brake or drive-off lock.

For notes on safety and operation, For notes on safety and operation,
refer to the “Opening/locking” section of refer to the “Opening/locking” section of Danger.
the Operating Instructions. the Operating Instructions. Make absolutely sure that the parking
brake is applied before you operate the
bus stop brake emergency release switch.
The bus could otherwise roll away.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 167


Switch descriptions
ADR button (accident data recorder) (option)

ADR button (accident data recorder)


(option)
Pressing the ADR button after an event
informs the accident data recorder that
the event was of particular importance
and prompts the memory manager to
keep the event stored in the memory for
longer than normal.

Note:
The accident data recorder (ADR) is a
system for detecting and recording ac-
cidents and driving events, e.g. pulling
away against a kerb or sudden braking.
The data are generated into an electron-
ic report that documents the course of
the event in full detail, in real time and
without any possibility of fraud. The re-
port therefore constitutes evidence that
would be admissible in court.

168 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Table of contents

Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170


Grammer driver’s seat control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat controls (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Operation of the jump seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Adjusting a passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Using the driver's seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Operating the jump-seat seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Passenger-compartment-seating seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Removing a seat squab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fitting a seat squab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Seat belt reminder display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Passenger seat service set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 169


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Driver's seat

Driver's seat
It is essential that the following instruc-
tions be observed:

Danger.
In the interests of road safety, the driver-
's seat must not be adjusted when the
bus is in motion.

Note:
The following descriptions provide a brief
overview of the control elements. In each
case, the manufacturer's Operating In-
structions must be observed.

170 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 171


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Grammer driver’s seat control elements

Grammer driver’s seat control


elements

172 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Grammer driver’s seat control elements

1 Backrest adjustment
Note: Note:
Note: (+) chamber fills up/(-) cham- Relieve the load on the back-
Relieve load on backrest - ber empties rest. Pull button upwards.
pull lever upwards - move in- 5 Height adjustment The seat angle can now be
to required position - release adjusted.
lever. 11 Seat cushion depth adjust-
Note:
2 Lateral support adjustment ment
Pull lever up = upwards ad-
justment/press lever down =
Note: Note:
downwards adjustment
Pull button upwards. The seat
Individually adjustable lateral 6 Damper setting
support by two compressed- cushion can now be adjusted.
air chambers. (+) chamber 12 Driver's seat fore-and-aft ad-
Note:
fills up/(-) chamber empties justment
The damper setting can
3 Lumbar support (upper cham-
be continuously adjusted
ber) Note:
between soft and hard
Pull lever upwards. The seat
7 Rapid lowering can now be slid in the longit-
Note:
8 Seat belt buckle udinal direction.
(+) chamber fills up/(-) cham-
ber empties 9 Seat heating/seat climate
control (option)
4 Lumbar support (lower cham-
10 Seat cushion angle adjust-
ber)
ment

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 173


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat controls (option)

ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat


controls (option)

174 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
ISRI 6860/875 driver's seat controls (option)

1 Driver's seat fore-and-aft ad- 8 Lumbar support


justment Note:
Thermostatically controlled Note:
Note: seat cushion and backrest Press the button to charge
Pull lever upwards. The seat heating. and discharge each air cham-
can now be slid in the longit- 5 Lowering ber
udinal direction.
9 Swivel release mechanism
2 Tilt adjustment Note: 10 Backrest adjustment
Lower the seat by press-
Note: ing the rocker switch down. Note:
Pull the handle up. Adjust Move the seat to the adjusted
height by pressing the rocker Pull the handle up and move
the tilt angle by applying
switch up. the backrest to the desired
load on or relieving load from position.
the front section of the seat 6 Damper adjustment
cushion. 11 Shoulder adjustment
3 Seat cushion depth adjust- Note:
ment Note:
Handle up = minimum damp-
ing. Handle down = maximum Pull the handle up and move
Note: damping. the upper half of the backrest
to the desired position.
Raise the lever and push the 7 Height adjustment
seat cushion forwards/back- 12 Armrest
wards. Engage the seat cush-
ion again. Note:
4 Heating Pull or press the handle and
adjust the seat to the desired
height.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 175


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Operation of the jump seat

Operation of the jump seat


Note: Danger.
The armrest can be adjus- Note: If you stand up, the seat cushion will
ted to any angle using the automatically return to its original posi-
Only accompanying staff should sit on the
knurled knob. tion. Fold the jump seat down again as
jump seat.
described above if you wish to sit down
again on this seat.

M91_00-0009-01

Folding out the jump seat: move


stop lever (1) in the direction of the
arrow and fold down the seat cush-
ion using grab handle (2).
The jump seat cannot be stopped
in the horizontal position. You must
hold down the seat cushion until you
are seated.

176 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Adjusting a passenger seat

Adjusting a passenger seat Sideways adjustment of aisle-side


Note: seats
There are several backrest positions
between the vertical normal position and Note:
the tilted limit position. You can choose
Press forward section of rocker (2) and,
any of these positions.
at the same time, move the seat towards
Adjusting the backrest (window side): or away from the centre aisle.

Folding the armrest up or down


Note:
Pull back small black lever (3) between Note:
the seat cushion and vehicle wall. At the
Aisle side: Grasp the front of the raised
same time, push back on the backrest
M91.00-0046-71 armrest and lift it slightly. Then carefully
with your upper body. Release lever (3)
Adjusting the backrest (aisle side): fold the armrest down. To fold the arm-
when the backrest is at the desired posi-
rest up, simply pull it upwards. The arm-
tion.
rest engages in its limit position automat-
Note: ically.
Press the rear section of rocker (1) and,
at the same time, push back on the back- Note:
rest with your upper body. Release the There are several backrest positions Note:
rocker when the backrest is at the de- between the vertical normal position and
sired position. The backrest locks in Window side: The armrest for the win-
the tilted limit position. You can choose
place immediately. dow seat (option) is located between the
any of these positions.
seats. It simply folds up and down.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 177


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Using the driver's seat belt

Using the driver's seat belt Operating the jump-seat seat belt
Danger. Fastening the seat belt: make sure
Note: The seat belt must not pass over your the seat belt is not twisted, position
The driver's seat that was fitted during neck, be snagged or rub against sharp it tightly over your pelvis and lock it
production has an integrated belt system. edges. It should fit as close to the body so that you can hear it engage in the
Consequently, the user information and as possible. You should therefore avoid belt lock.
instructions apply only to the factory-fit- wearing bulky clothing. Do not route the
ted belts. seat belt over solid or fragile objects
in pockets in your clothing. Frequently Danger.
retighten the seat belt over your shoulder. This seat should only be occupied by the
Note: official person accompanying the bus.
Releasing the seat belt: press the
In Germany, the seat belt must remain red button in the buckle and assist Releasing the seat belt: press the
fastened at all times while the vehicle is the inertia reel by guiding the seat red button in the buckle and assist
in motion (Section 21a of the German belt back. the inertia reel by guiding the seat
road traffic regulations (StVO)). The rules
belt back.
and regulations of the country in which
the vehicle is operated must be observed.

Fastening the seat belt: pass the


seat belt untwisted and tightly across
your pelvis and shoulder and insert it
into the belt buckle until you hear it
engage.

178 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Passenger-compartment-seating seat belt

Passenger-compartment-seating Removing a seat squab Fitting a seat squab


seat belt Lift the seat squab at the front
Fastening the seat belt: make sure slightly and slide the rear into the
the seat belt is not twisted, position guide as far as the stop. Press the
it tightly over your pelvis and lock it front of the seat squab down until
so that you can hear it engage in the you hear it engage.
belt buckle.

Note:
A seat belt may only be used to restrain
one person at any one time.
M91.00-0047-71

To remove the seat squab, grasp the


front of the seat squab with both
hands and pull upwards. Then pull
the squab in the direction of travel
and out of the guide and remove it
upwards.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 179


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Seat belt reminder display

Seat belt reminder display


Seat belt reminder display

M54_00-0978-01

With the ignition switched on and the


doors closed, “Fasten seat belts” symbol
(1) on the right-hand side at the front of
the passenger compartment is displayed
for 5 minutes after the bus has pulled
away.

180 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 181


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Passenger seat service set

Passenger seat service set

182 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driver’s seat/passenger seats
Passenger seat service set

1 Loudspeaker
2 Air vents
3 Stop button (stop request)
4 Attendant call button (button
lights up when pressed)
5 Reading lamp
6 Reading lamp button

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 183


184 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
Transmission shift systems
Table of contents

Transmission shift system safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186


Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift aid) transmission shift system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Transmission shift system GO 250-8 (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selector lever) (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 185


Transmission shift systems
Transmission shift system safety precautions

Transmission shift system safety vice brake at a low engine speed, the ult in increased clutch wear. If the brake
precautions electronics will disengage the clutch auto- pedal is depressed rather more forcefully
matically. This would interrupt the flow (more than 10% brake pedal travel), the
of tractive power and the vehicle could clutch will open so far that it no longer
begin to roll back, e.g. on an uphill gradi- slips.
Danger. ent.
If it is necessary to disembark, even for a
short time, with the engine still running, Note:
you must make sure that the transmission Note: In the event of increased loading on the
is in position “N” (neutral), the parking For as long as both the accelerator pedal clutch, an alert (grey) will appear on the
brake has been applied and the bus has and the brake pedal remain fully released, display screen. If the load persists, a
been secured by chocks. It is permiss- the clutch will stay closed and the vehicle warning alert (yellow) will appear and the
ible to disembark with the engine still will creep at idling speed. This works in creep function will be deactivated auto-
running only if no passengers remain in the 1st and 2nd gears. matically. This is designed to rule out an
the passenger compartment and the bus overloading of the clutch by the creep
has been secured against unauthorised function.
access.
Caution:
The least wearing on the clutch is idle
creeping. In stop-start traffic, therefore,
Danger.
the brake pedal should be used as spar-
The bus is equipped with a creep func- ingly as possible (under consideration of
tion. When the service brake is released the road and traffic situation) so that the
with the creep function activated, the bus vehicle always creeps at idling speed. To
will creep forwards independently with the keep the driving speed as low as pos-
engine continuing to run at idling speed. sible, it is possible to shift manually into
If the engine speed drops below approx- 1st gear. If the speed of the bus is kept
imately 550 rpm due to increased driving low by means of the brake pedal, the
resistance and/or you operate the ser- clutch will start to slip. This would res-

186 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift aid) transmission shift system

Operating the PSH (pneumatic shift more slowly, i.e. half as fast. Disengage- Transmission shift system GO 250-8
aid) transmission shift system ment of a gear is just as fast as normal. (system description)
The best gearshifts are achieved by mov-
The GO 250-8 transmission is adapted
ing the gear selector lever with gentle
force and “waiting” for the PSH gearshift.
to the engine by a dry clutch. As the
Of course, it is possible to change gear clutch is controlled automatically by the
faster in difficult situations. transmission system, there is no need
for a clutch pedal.
Changing gear in the event of PSH Gears are shifted and the clutch is op-
failure erated electropneumatically. An elec-
tronics unit attached to the transmission
Note: controls the valves of the pneumatic ac-
PSH, the pneumatic shift aid, is designed tuating cylinders at the gear, gate and
to make changing gear easier and its clutch.
M26_00-0004-01
pressure is limited to 2.4 bar. If PSH The driver selects the direction of travel
Changing gear fails, it is still possible to select any of using the gearshift unit and is then able
the gears while the bus is in motion,
to control the forwards and reversing
but increased effort will be required. The
Note:
gearshift duration (shift lever pressed to
motion of the bus using the accelerator
This transmission shift system works gear engaged) will be longer because syn- and brake pedal. Advantage: the driver
purely mechanically. At approximately chronisation will not be as fast. is relieved of having to change gear and
90 mm, the shift throws are only half as use a clutch.
long as those of conventional shift sys- Using the gearshift unit, the driver can
tems. However, the time that is needed
choose between automatic and manu-
for a gear change in the transmission due
to synchronisation is nearly the same in al gear selection. Manual gear selection
physical terms. This means that, to en- should, however, only be used in spe-
gage the next gear, the driver is now cial cases, e.g. to brake the bus or when
able to move the shift lever handle much driving over mountainous terrain. Auto-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 187


Transmission shift systems
Transmission shift system GO 250-8 (system description)

matic mode should be used for all nor- (e.g. gear, malfunction, etc.) to the
mal driving conditions. driver.
As the basis for selecting the appropri- The system has a failsafe mode that can
ate gear, the intelligent gear selection be activated in the event of a fault in the
function in automatic mode takes into transmission shift system. In this mode,
consideration the driver's commands (op- it is possible to drive the bus away from
eration of the accelerator pedal and ser- areas of danger or to the nearest work-
vice brake), the current engine operating shop. Even if no faults are present, it
state, uphill or downhill gradients and is possible to activate failsafe mode for
the load on the bus. This achieves the training purposes as preparation for this
optimum compromise between comfort, situation.
fuel economy and wear. Refer to “Operation of GO 250-8
The drive control module coordinates the failsafe mode” in this section.
functions of the drivetrain by informing
the engine control module how much en-
gine torque is required and by informing
the transmission control module of the
gear to be selected and the clutch posi-
tion to be adopted.
The mechatronic transmission and en-
gine control units then implement the
control commands of the drive control
for the engine and transmission.
The screen in the instrument panel
shows all necessary system information

188 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 189


Transmission shift systems
GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selector lever) (option)

GO 250 - 8 gearshift unit (selector


lever) (option)

190 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

1 Neutral button Operation of the GO 250-8


2 To shift down/to select re- PowerShift transmission shift Danger.
verse gear system (option) The PowerShift transmission shift system
3 Function button automatically disengages the clutch if the
M/A To switch to manual mode/ Danger. engine speed drops below 600 rpm in
automatic mode 1st gear. The power flow is interrupted
Never leave the driver's area with the and the bus could roll back, e.g. on uphill
engine running and a gear engaged. gradients, and you could thereby cause
Note:
an accident. For this reason, never allow
In automatic mode, press- the engine speed to drop below 600 rpm
ing briefly toggles between Danger. in 1st gear.
“Basic” and “Dynamic”.
In the event of a loss of pressure or in-
4 To shift up +++ Selecting the operating mode
sufficient supply pressure in the trans-
mission/clutch circuit, it would no longer +++
be possible to shift gear or operate the
clutch. Risk of accident. Do not set the Note:
vehicle in motion or, if it is already in
With the PowerShift transmission shift
motion, bring the vehicle to a halt imme-
system, it is possible to drive in one of
diately (road and traffic conditions permit-
two operating modes: Manual mode or
ting). Secure the vehicle against rolling
automatic mode. In manual mode, you
away, e.g. using the parking brake. Have
are able to determine the shift point
the compressed-air system inspected im-
and shift direction yourself. In automat-
mediately and repaired at a qualified spe-
ic mode, you simply need to shift into the
cialist workshop. EvoBus recommends an
starting gear. The PowerShift transmis-
EvoBus Service Partner for this work. It is
sion shift system then changes gear auto-
essential that work relevant to safety or
matically, depending on the engine speed,
work on safety-related systems be carried
accelerator pedal position, load on the en-
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
gine, operating status of the continuous

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 191


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

brake, load on the bus and gradient of


the road.

Note:
In automatic mode, two shift programs
are available: “Basic” and “Dynamic”.
These can be activated by means of the
A/M pushbutton on the selector lever.
The “Basic” shift program is optimised for
fuel economy and should generally be the
program of choice. The “Dynamic” shift M54.00-2278-71 M26_00-0122-71
program has a positive effect on the ac-
In manual mode (1), “M” appears Pressing the selector lever to the
celerative performance of the vehicle by
shifting up at higher engine speeds than next to the gear indicator. left switches from manual mode to
in the “Basic” shift program. This leads to automatic mode.
higher fuel consumption than in “Basic”
mode.

192 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

Note: Note:
To change from “Basic” to “Dynamic” in In “Dynamic” mode, upshifts take place at
automatic mode, press the selector lever higher engine speeds.
briefly to the left.
+++ Selecting transmission neutral
position +++

Danger.
If you were to select the transmission
neutral position while the bus were in mo-
M54.00-2075-71
tion, you would lose tractive power or the
In automatic mode, “A” appears next braking effect of the engine. It may not
to gear indicator (1). then be possible to bring the bus to a
halt in good time and you could thereby
cause an accident. For this reason, you
Note:
should never select the transmission neut-
For journeys on arduous terrain, it is ad- M54.00-2277-71 ral position manually while the bus is in
visable to select manual mode in order to In “Dynamic” automatic mode, “dyn” motion.
avoid undesired upshifting, for example,
(1) appears below the gear indicator.
and therefore interruptions in tractive
power.
Note:
It is possible to select transmission neut-
ral position “N” from any gear provided
the selector lever is in the basic position.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 193


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

+++ Selecting reverse gear +++


Stop the bus.
Apply the service brake or parking
brake.

M26_00-0123-71 M54.00-2074-71

Press neutral button (1). “N” appears in gear indicator (1) as


soon as the transmission neutral pos-
ition is selected.

Note:
If the bus is coasting in transmission
neutral position “N”, move the gear lever
forwards or back. The PowerShift trans-
mission shift system engages the optim-
um gear.

194 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

M26_00-0124-71 M54.00-2077-71 M26_00-0023-01

Press and hold function button (3) “R” appears in gear indicator (1) as Depress the accelerator pedal slowly
and pull the selector lever back (2) soon as reverse gear is selected. and simultaneously release the park-
until resistance can be felt. ing brake.

Note: Danger.
Reverse gear can be selected from trans- The bus may roll away if you do not de-
mission neutral position only. press accelerator pedal (5).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 195


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

Danger.
There is no engine braking effect if the
bus starts to move without a gear having
been selected. Do not allow the bus to
roll against the direction of travel of the
gear that is currently engaged.

The bus starts to move (clutch closes


automatically)
+++ Change of direction +++
M26_00-0125-71 M26_00-0126-71

Danger.
+++ Pulling away +++ Keep function button (3) pressed and
move the gear lever forwards (4).
The direction of travel cannot be changed
Note:
unless the bus is stationary, otherwise the
transmission will automatically shift into Press function button (3). Note:
neutral. All changes of direction must The starting gear can be selected from
take place via neutral. Only the screen transmission neutral position only.
display provides a reliable indication of
which direction of travel is selected inside The PowerShift transmission shift
the transmission. system selects 2nd gear (starting
gear).

196 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

Note: Caution: Note:


If the transmission detects an uphill gradi- The least wearing on the clutch is idle In the event of increased loading on the
ent, 1st gear is selected as the starting creeping. In stop-start traffic, therefore, clutch, a yellow alert warning will appear
gear automatically. the brake pedal should be used as spar- on the display screen and the creep func-
ingly as possible (under consideration of tion will be deactivated automatically.
the road and traffic situation) so that the This is designed to rule out an overload-
Danger. vehicle always creeps at idling speed. To ing of the clutch by the creep function.
keep the driving speed as low as pos-
The bus is equipped with a creep func- sible, it is possible to shift manually into
tion. When the service brake is released 1st gear. If the speed of the bus is kept
with the creep function activated, the bus low by means of the brake pedal, the
will creep forwards independently with the clutch will start to slip. This would res-
engine continuing to run at idling speed. ult in increased clutch wear. If the brake
If the engine speed drops below approx- pedal is depressed rather more forcefully
imately 550 rpm due to increased driving (more than 10% brake pedal travel), the
resistance and/or you operate the ser- clutch will open so far that it no longer
vice brake at a low engine speed, the slips.
electronics will disengage the clutch auto-
matically. This would interrupt the flow
of tractive power and the vehicle could
Note:
begin to roll back, e.g. on an uphill gradi- M26_00-0023-01
ent. For as long as both the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal remain fully released,
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly
the clutch will stay closed and the vehicle and simultaneously release the park-
will creep at idling speed. This works in ing brake.
the 1st and 2nd gears.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 197


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

+++ Changing the starting gear +++


Danger.
The bus may roll away if you do not de- Note:
press accelerator pedal (5). 2nd gear is the highest gear that can be
selected as the starting gear.

Danger.
There is no engine braking effect if the
bus starts to move without a gear having
been selected. Do not allow the bus to
roll against the direction of travel of the
M26_00-0023-01
gear that is currently engaged.
+++ Hill starts +++
The bus starts to move (clutch closes
automatically) Danger.
A gear must be engaged before you at-
Note: tempt to pull away on an uphill gradient.
M26_00-0127-71
Change the starting gear if 1st gear selec- Then depress accelerator pedal (5). Do
ted by the PowerShift transmission shift To shift up a gear from the gear se- not release parking brake (4) until you
system appears to be an unsuitable gear lected, move the selector lever for- can feel the torque in the drive train.
in which to pull away. wards (4) until resistance can be felt. There would otherwise be a risk of the
bus rolling backwards.
To shift down a gear, pull the select-
or lever backwards until resistance
can be felt.

198 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

+++ Accelerating +++ +++ Kickdown (automatic drive +++ Decelerating +++
mode) +++
Release the accelerator pedal.
Note:
Note:
Slowly depress the brake pedal
Whenever the maximum engine speed for and/or activate the continuous
the current driving situation is reached in Kickdown is used to achieve maximum brake.
the gear selected, the PowerShift trans- bus acceleration.
mission shift system shifts up to the next
optimum gear (in automatic drive mode). Depress the accelerator pedal bey- Note:
ond the pressure point as far as the The PowerShift transmission shift system
stop. will shift down into a lower gear if neces-
Note: sary (in automatic drive mode).
In automatic mode, you can use the ac- Note:
celerator pedal position to actively influ- +++Gearshifts in automatic drive
The PowerShift transmission shift system mode+++
ence the shift point. Little throttle = early will shift down into a lower gear if neces-
upshift/more throttle = late upshift. sary.
Note:
Ease off the accelerator pedal once All upshifts and downshifts are carried
Note: the desired speed has been reached. out automatically. These take place in re-
In “Basic mode”, the engine does not sponse to the driving situation, engine
reach the maximum rpm in each gear. Note: load, accelerator pedal position, road
Where increased power is required, it will speed and engine speed.
be necessary to activate “Dynamic mode” The PowerShift transmission shift system
or use the kickdown function. shifts back up.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 199


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

+++ Gearshifts in manual mode +++


Caution:
In overrun mode, the PowerShift transmis- Note:
sion shift system shifts up shortly before In either operating mode (manual/auto-
the engine limit speed is reached. A yel- matic), it is possible to intervene manu-
low alert appears on the display screen ally to override the gear selected by the
with the text: “Bremse betätigen” (Apply PowerShift transmission shift system.
the brake). A warning tone sounds if the
engine limit speed is exceeded.

M54.00-2279-71

If an up arrow appears below the “M”


in manual mode (1), the engine is
operating in an unfavourable speed
range. This is a recommendation to
shift up a gear.
Move the selector lever forwards 2
M26_00-0127-71
times (4).

M54.00-2075-71
To shift up, move the selector lever The PowerShift transmission shift
forwards (4) until resistance can be system shifts up 2 gears.
Screen display in automatic drive
felt.
mode (gear indicator 1-8 with “A”).
The PowerShift transmission shift
system shifts up a gear.

200 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

Caution:
If the target gear is too low, the
PowerShift transmission shift system
shifts down only to a permissible gear
that would not cause the engine to
overrev.

Engine braking effect during a gear-


shift

M26_00-0128-71 M54.00-2280-71 Note:


To shift down, pull the selector lever If a down arrow appears below the The braking effect of the engine is tem-
back (2) until resistance can be felt. “M” in manual mode (1), the engine porarily interrupted for the duration of a
is operating in an unfavourable speed gearshift (drive train disconnected by the
The PowerShift transmission shift transmission system). Once the shift has
range. This is a recommendation to
system shifts down a gear. been completed, the engine braking effect
shift down a gear.
is automatically restored.
Pull the selector lever back two times
(2).
The PowerShift transmission shift Note:
system shifts down 2 gears. In automatic drive mode, operation of
the continuous brake causes the system
to shift down so that maximum engine
braking effect is achieved. The extent of
the downshift depends on the continuous
braking demand and the coolant temper-
ature.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 201


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift transmission shift system (option)

Shift down if necessary.


Danger. The PowerShift transmission shift Danger.
The engine braking effect is interrupted system disengages the clutch shortly It is not possible to park the bus with a
for the duration of the gearshift. The bus before engine idling speed has been gear engaged. The PowerShift transmis-
may accelerate if you are driving downhill reached. sion shift system always selects transmis-
at this time. sion neutral position “N” when the engine
is switched off. If you do not secure the
+++ Stopping +++ Note: stationary bus using the parking brake,
The PowerShift transmission shift sys- the bus could roll away and you could
Danger. tem engages the starting gear (1st or 2nd cause an accident. For this reason, al-
gear) whenever the bus comes to a halt. ways secure the bus using the parking
The PowerShift transmission shift system brake.
automatically disengages the clutch if the
engine speed drops below 600 rpm in
Caution:
1st gear. Tractive power would be lost Note:
and the bus could roll away if the engine Do not leave the driver's area with a gear
is still running and a gear is still selec- engaged and the parking brake applied. If the bus is parked and the engine is
ted (e.g. on uphill gradients). You could This state is not permitted and over time left running, the transmission will shift
thereby cause an accident. Whenever results in damage to the transmission. into neutral automatically after 5 minutes.
you stop the bus, always secure the bus Always select the transmission neutral After 4 minutes, the “N” gear indicator
against rolling away using the service position first. will start to flash. The indicator continues
brake or the parking brake. to flash until the starting gear is engaged.
+++ Parking the bus +++
Apply the brakes. Stop the bus.
Apply the parking brake.

202 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

Operation of the GO 250-8


PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

Danger.
Never leave the driver's area with the
engine running and a gear engaged.

Note:
Under specific circumstances, the en-
M26_00-0123-71 M54.00-2074-71 gine could stall, particularly if the bus is
Press neutral button (1). “N” appears in gear indicator (1) as brought to a halt under heavy braking.
soon as the transmission neutral pos-
ition is selected.
Note:
Switch off the engine.
A malfunction in the system is indicated
on the instrument cluster display screen
in conjunction with a red or yellow warn-
ing level malfunction display. In the event
of a yellow alert, the vehicle can contin-
ue to be driven in a failsafe mode to the
nearest OMNIplus Service Partner.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 203


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

Note: Danger. Note:


It is possible to activate failsafe mode The bus must be stopped immediately A yellow warning level malfunction dis-
for training purposes even if there is no (traffic conditions permitting) if a red play appears when switch (2) is pressed
transmission fault present. warning level malfunction is displayed. if failsafe mode cannot be activated (ex-
clamation mark not present in the gear
Bring the bus to a halt and apply the indicator on the display screen). Have the
parking brake. malfunction rectified by an OMNIplus Ser-
vice Partner.

Note:
Neither operating mode (automatic/manu-
al) is displayed in failsafe mode.

M54.00-2282-71

A malfunction in the system is in-


dicated by an icon (1) appearing in M26_00-0052-71
the centre of the display screen in Press the upper section of switch (2)
conjunction with a red warning level to activate failsafe mode.
(2) or yellow warning level (3) mal-
function display. In the event of a
red warning level, an audible warning
also sounds.

204 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

Note: Note:
The type of malfunction display depends The selectable gears, 2nd gear (1) or re-
on the fault. verse gear (2), are displayed. It is pos-
sible to select the transmission neutral
position at any time.

Note:
Failsafe mode can be activated only with
the bus stationary and with the parking
M54.00-2281-71 brake engaged. It is operated by means
Symbol (3) is now highlighted. of the two pushbuttons shown. When
Failsafe mode has been activated. failsafe mode is activated, the transmis-
sion shifts to neutral even if a gear was
previously engaged (unless a severe fault
Note: is present). In failsafe mode, it is possible
M54.00-2080-71
The yellow warning level malfunction dis- to engage gears as follows: - Upshift
The two switches on the instrument from neutral into the slow forward gear
play is automatically cleared after a short
panel for controlling the failsafe D1 (2nd gear possible only when station-
time.
mode are now shown as symbols ary) - Upshift from 2nd gear into the fast
on the display screen. forward gear D2 (4th gear possible only
when stationary) - Shift from neutral into
reverse gear (reverse gear possible only
when stationary).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 205


Transmission shift systems
Operation of the GO 250-8 PowerShift failsafe mode (option)

Note:
The yellow warning level malfunction dis-
play remains lit.

Note:
The requested gear in failsafe mode is
shown to flash until the driver operates
the accelerator pedal within the next 10
seconds. If the accelerator pedal is not
operated, no gear change will take place. M68_00-0125-01

It is possible to change to the basic


screen at any time by pressing the
lower section of screen control push-
button (1). Failsafe mode remains
active in the background.

206 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driving systems
Table of contents

Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208


Automatic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Automatic speed limiter (function description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Variable speed limiter (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Combined drive/brake cruise control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Activating combined drive/brake cruise control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 207


Driving systems
Driving systems

Driving systems cruise control” in the “Driver's area con-


The bus may be equipped with the trols” section.
following driving systems:
Automatic speed limiter
Variable speed limiter (Temposet)
Combined cruise control (drive/brake
cruise control)

Danger.
The driving systems listed are only an M54_00-1002-01

aid to assist the driver, e.g. to drive at It is possible to switch between the
a preselected road speed. The driver variable speed limiter (Temposet) and
is responsible at all times for the actu- drive/brake cruise control driving sys-
al speed of the bus and for maintaining tems at any time while the bus is in mo-
an adequate distance from the vehicle in
tion. The symbol for the selected driving
front.
system is shown on the display screen.

Caution: Note:
In the case of buses with manual trans- Press button (B) to switch between com-
mission, the driver must be prepared to bined drive/brake cruise control and the
change gear in order to regulate engine variable speed limiter (Temposet).
speed whenever the bus is being acceler-
ated or decelerated by cruise control. For further notes on operation, refer
to “Combination switch for retarder and

208 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driving systems
Automatic speed limiter

Automatic speed limiter Automatic speed limiter (function tivated and this symbol (1) appears on
Since 01.01.2005, all our buses in the description) the display screen.
EU have been limited to a legally spe- Functions: Speed limiter warning message
cified maximum speed of 100 km/h.
Speed limiter active
On steep downhill gradients, this speed
Speed limiter warning message
may be exceeded for various reasons if
the driver does not actively brake the Speed limiter active
bus.
In these cases, the speed limiter would
stabilise the speed of the bus automat-
ically using the continuous brake (re-
tarder).

Note:
M54.00-2082-71
The maximum limit speed corresponds to
the value set in the speed limiter and not This warning message appears on the in-
to the speed controls in force in other strument cluster display screen together
countries (i.e. a fixed value that cannot with a yellow warning level malfunction if
be changed, e.g. during long-distance M54.00-2081-71 a speed of 107 km/h is reached despite
travel from one country to another). The automatic speed limiter constantly use of the retarder or if retarder brak-
monitors the maximum speed for the ing performance is reduced (due to high
vehicle. If 100 km/h is reached in over- coolant temperatures). A warning tone
run mode, the engine torque is reduced also sounds.
first. If a speed of 104 km/h is reached
despite this measure, the retarder is ac-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 209


Driving systems
Variable speed limiter (Temposet)

Variable speed limiter (Temposet)


Danger. Using the speed limiter, it is possible Danger.
To avoid the risk of endangering passen- to set any speed above 15 km/h as a The speed limiter is only an aid designed
gers and other road users, it will be ne- limit speed. It is possible to accelerate to assist driving. You are responsible at
cessary to brake the bus using the ser- the bus up to the speed set using the all times for the speed of the bus and for
vice brake. accelerator pedal. maintaining an adequate distance to the
vehicle in front. Do not use the speed
limiter unless traffic conditions permit a
Danger. constant speed to be maintained.
Note:
The menu that was displayed at the time The speed limiter limits the set speed
of the warning returns to the display automatically. The speed limiter is unable
screen as soon as the speed of the bus to interpret road and traffic conditions
drops back below the defined maximum itself.
speed.

Note:
The retarder is automatically activated if
the set limit speed is exceeded by more
than 4 km/h in overrun mode.

210 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driving systems
Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet)

Activating the variable speed limiter


(Temposet)

Note:
It is possible to exceed the stored limit
speed, e.g. when overtaking. To do this,
depress the accelerator pedal briefly bey-
ond the full-throttle position as far as the
stop. As soon as the overtaking man-
oeuvre is over, release the accelerator
pedal briefly and depress it again. This
will reactivate the set limit speed. M54.00-2083-71 M54_00-0993-01

Press function toggle button (B) re- Move steering column switch (A) to
peatedly until LIM appears on the position (1.1).
Note: display screen
If the bus is travelling faster than the Note:
stored limit speed at this time, the bus Note: The variable speed limiter (Temposet) is
will be decelerated automatically by the
The variable speed limiter (Temposet) is now activated.
retarder.
now selected.
Use the accelerator pedal to acceler-
ate the bus up to the desired speed.
Briefly move steering column switch
(A) to position (1.1).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 211


Driving systems
Activating the variable speed limiter (Temposet)

Hold steering column switch (A) in


position (1.2) for some time.

Note:
The maximum speed is reduced in incre-
ments of 5 km/h.

Release the steering column switch.

Note:

M54.00-2083-71 M54_00-0993-01
The selected limit speed is stored.
The “LIM” icon and the stored max- Hold steering column switch (A) in
imum speed are shown on the dis- position (1.1) for some time.
play screen whenever the variable
speed limiter (Temposet) is active. Note:
The maximum speed is increased in incre-
Note: ments of 5 km/h.
Briefly pressing the steering column
switch to position (1.1) or position (1.2)
now increases or reduces the stored
limit speed in increments of 0.5 km/h
respectively.

212 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driving systems
Combined drive/brake cruise control (option)

Combined drive/brake cruise tions permit a constant speed to be main-


control (option) Danger. tained. It may not be possible for a con-
stant speed to be maintained on steep
Combined drive/brake cruise control is To maintain the stored speed, combined
uphill or downhill gradients. Take your
able to control both the engine and the drive/brake cruise control automatically
foot off the accelerator pedal when cruise
retarder. The system maintains a stored operates either the engine control in or-
control is active.
cruising speed provided there is suffi- der to accelerate the bus (drive cruise
cient engine power output or retarder control) or the engine brake and retarder
to decelerate the bus (brake cruise con-
braking output available (with a toler- Note:
trol). Combined drive/brake cruise con-
ance of +2.5 mph (+4 km/h) on down- trol is unable to interpret road and traffic The retarder may be activated for ad-
hill gradients). On level surfaces and on conditions itself. For this reason, do not ditional braking force. The cruise con-
uphill gradients, the speed is regulated activate combined drive/brake cruise con- trol system will remain active. The ser-
by the engine (drive cruise control). On trol on slippery road surfaces, in fog or in vice brake may also be applied while the
downhill gradients, the speed is regu- difficult road and traffic conditions. You bus is being braked by the retarder. The
lated by the retarder (brake cruise con- could fail to recognise dangers in good cruise control system will remain active.
trol). The speed is maintained constant time, and endanger yourself and others. If cruise control is braking the bus us-
only for as long as the braking perform- When driving on a slippery road surface, ing the retarder, the retarder will not be
the wheels could lock and the bus could deactivated if the service brake is then
ance of the retarder remains sufficient
skid. applied. As soon as the retarder is de-
for this to be possible. If necessary, shift
activated, the bus will accelerate to the
down and reduce speed.
previously stored speed.
Danger.
The cruise control function is only an aid
designed to assist driving. The driver is
responsible at all times for the speed of
the bus and for maintaining an adequate
distance to the vehicle in front. Do not
use cruise control unless traffic condi-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 213


Driving systems
Activating combined drive/brake cruise control (option)

Activating combined drive/brake


cruise control (option)

Note:
Precondition: bus speed must be great-
er than 10 mph (15 km/h). The clutch
and service brake pedals must be fully re-
leased and the continuous brakes must
not be active.

M54_00-1003-01 M54.00-2084-71
Note:
Briefly move the steering column The desired speed set is shown in
The speed is maintained constant only
for as long as the braking performance of switch to position (1.1) or (1.2) (< the display.
the retarder remains sufficient for this to 0.5 seconds).
be possible. If necessary, shift down and Note:
reduce speed. Note: Repeated and brief movement to position
Moving the steering column switch to po- (1.1) (< 0.5 seconds) = increase in set
sition (1.2) enables you to call up a previ- speed in 0.5 km/h increments. Repeated
Note: ously stored speed. and brief movement to position (1.2) (<
It is possible to exceed the stored speed, 0.5 seconds) = reduction in set speed in
e.g. when overtaking. To do this, depress 0.5 km/h increments.
the accelerator pedal. When the overtak-
ing manoeuvre is over, release the accel-
erator pedal again. Cruise control will re-
adjust the speed of the bus to the stored
speed.

214 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Driving systems
Activating combined drive/brake cruise control (option)

Note: Note:
Holding the steering column switch (> - if the bus is braked using the service
0.5 seconds) in position (1.1) accelerates brake and cruise control is currently in
the bus. When the combination switch is operation. The speed set remains stored.
released, the current speed is set as the
new value.
Note:
- if the speed drops below 10 mph (15
Note: km/h), a short warning signal will sound.
Holding the steering column switch (> The speed set remains stored.
0.5 seconds) in position (1.2) decelerates M54.00-2085-71
the bus. When the combination switch is After a brief delay, the desired speed
released, the current speed is set as the set (3) appears on the display screen Note:
new value. along with “cruise control” icon (2) - if the clutch pedal is depressed for
(see illustration). longer than 5 seconds, e.g. during gear
Move the steering column switch to selection. A short warning signal will
sound.
position (1.3).
The combined drive/brake cruise
control is deactivated. Cruise control Note:
is deactivated automatically: - if the transmission is shifted to the
neutral position for longer than 5
seconds. A short warning signal will
sound.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 215


216 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Table of contents

Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Manually regulating the blower speed in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Manually regulating the blower speed in the passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Activating the air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Activating air-recirculation mode in the driver's area/passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Activating the reheat function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Activating the auxiliary heating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Deactivating an activated switch-on time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Programming the auxiliary heating switch-on duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 217


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Operating instructions for the air-conditioning system

Operating instructions for the air-


conditioning system

Note:
For optimum climate control in heating or
cooling mode, the driver's window should
remain closed while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.

Note:
The openings below the spare wheel in
the compartment must not be sealed or
covered by objects as troublefree oper-
ation of the heating, ventilation and air-
conditioning system would no longer be
guaranteed.

218 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 219


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel

Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
(HVAC) control panel

220 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel

4 Rocker switch for blower


Note: Note: speed control in the driver-
Switch the ignition starter switch to ON Air permanently flows out 's area
before you switch on the heating and of the swivelling air vents in 5 Button for temperature con-
ventilation control system. The driver’s the instrument panel (driver's trol in the passenger compart-
area air-conditioning cannot be operated station) and in the forward ment
separately from the passenger compart- structure (co-driver's seat)
ment air-conditioning. regardless of the position of Note:
the rotary knob. The airflow
can be regulated manually as Pressing the button for longer
1 Button for air-recirculation/
desired using the adjustment than 2 seconds automatically
fresh-air mode in the driver's selects the optimum temper-
area slide on the air vent itself.
ature. (LED in pushbutton (5)
2.1 Air distribution to the footwell unlit)
Note: 6 Automatic A/C mode
(Integrated LED lit in air-recir-
2.2 Air distribution to the footwell
“ON/OFF” button
culation mode - LED unlit in and windscreen
fresh-air mode) 2.3 Air distribution to the wind-
Note:
screen
2 Rotary knob for air distribu- (LED lit in automatic A/C
2.4 Fresh-air vent in the instru-
tion in the driver's area: Infin- mode)
ment panel
itely variable
2.5 Defrosting the windscreen
(blower automatically set to
fastest speed)
3 Rotary knob for temperature
control in the driver's area

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 221


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning (HVAC) control panel

7 Smog button for the driver- 8 Reheat button (use to dehu-


’s area and passenger com- midify the vehicle interior): Note:
partment (use, for instance, The air-conditioning system refer to “Programming the
when driving through a tun- is switched to heating con- preset timer”
nel): Passenger-compartment trol. The recirculated air (i.e.
and driver’s area ventilation the reduced amount of fresh
Danger.
switches to air-recirculation air) is cooled as it comes in-
mode. The roof hatches are to contact with the refrigerant Observe the safety precau-
closed automatically. heat exchanger and reheated tions for operation of the
by the heat exchanger for auxiliary heating unit in the
Operating Instructions.
Note: the heating system. This pro-
cess condenses water out of 11 Auxiliary heater “ON/OFF”
The LED integrated in the
button lights up. the air passed through the button: The integrated LED
system. The air directed to indicates when the auxiliary
passengers or the driver is heating unit is ready for oper-
thereby dehumidified. ation (in standby). The auxil-
iary heating unit switches to
Note: a state of readiness only if
the outside temperature is at
The LED integrated in the
button lights up
least 6 °C below the setpoint
value selected (passenger
9 Manual blower speed adjust- compartment).
ment button
10 Preset timer button:

222 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Manually regulating the blower speed in the driver's area

Manually regulating the blower


Danger. speed in the driver's area
Observe the safety precau-
tions for operation of the
auxiliary heating unit in the
Operating Instructions.
12 Rocker switch for adjusting
values and functions of push-
buttons 5/9/10:

M54.00-2086-71

This display appears on the instru-


M83_00-0783-71 ment cluster display screen
Press button (4) on the control panel
Note:
Note: The blower speed currently set is repres-
ented by the bars in the centre section of
The LED in the pushbutton starts to flash
the instrument cluster display screen.

Button (4) can now be used to re-


duce (-) or increase (+) the blower
speed.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 223


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature

Preselecting the passenger-


Note: compartment temperature
If button (4) is not pressed again with-
in 10 seconds or if a different button
is pressed, the indicator on the display
screen is cleared and the LED in the
rocker switch stops flashing. The newly
entered setpoint value is stored.

M54.00-2088-71

The setpoint value currently set is


M83.00-0901-71 represented by the bars in the centre
Press button (5) on the control panel. section of the instrument cluster dis-
play screen.
The LED in rocker switch (12) starts
to flash
Note:
The actual outside temperature (1) and
the temperature in the passenger com-
partment (2) are also displayed on the
display screen.

224 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Preselecting the passenger-compartment temperature

Note:
The setpoint value can be changed up or
down as required with button (12). The
setpoint value should only be changed in
small increments.

Note:
If button (12) is not pressed again with-
in 10 seconds or if a different button
M54.00-2088-71 is pressed, the indicator on the display M54.00-2090-71

The setpoint value for the passenger screen is cleared and the LEDs in the If no bars are shown and icon (1) is
compartment can now be changed rocker switch stop flashing. The newly displayed, this means that automat-
using rocker switch (12) (+ or -). entered setpoint value is stored. ic A/C regulation in the passenger
compartment has been deactivated.
Note:
Pressing button (5) for longer than 2
seconds automatically selects the optim-
um value. When the optimum value is set
(see the marker bars between + and - in
the display), the LED in pushbutton (5)
remains unlit.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 225


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Manually regulating the blower speed in the passenger compartment

Manually regulating the blower


speed in the passenger compart- Note:
ment Pressing button (9) for longer than 2
seconds automatically selects the optim-
um blower speed. At optimum blower
speed, the LED in pushbutton (9) remains
unlit.

Note:
If button (12) is not pressed again with-
M54.00-2087-71 in 10 seconds or if a different button
Whenever button (9) is pressed, the is pressed, the indicator on the display
LEDs in rocker switch (12) begin to screen is cleared and the LEDs in rock-
flash. The current blower speed is er switch (12) stop flashing. The newly
M83.00-0901-71
entered setpoint value is stored.
Press button (9) on the control panel represented by the bars on the in-
strument cluster display screen.
It is now possible to adjust the
ceiling blower speed to any value
between 20 % and 100 % by pressing
rocker switch (12) (+ or -).

226 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Activating the air-conditioning

Activating the air-conditioning


Note: Note:
The air-conditioning system is switched The status in effect at the time the ig-
on automatically after a 60 second delay nition starter switch is switched to OFF
depending on the desired temperature is retained when the ignition is switched
and the outside and interior temperat- back on.
ures. The “Temperature lockout” symbol
appears on the display screen if temper-
ature conditions are preventing the air-
conditioning system from switching on. If
button (6) is pressed in buses that do not
have an air-conditioning system, the “Air- If this symbol appears, current tem-
conditioning system not available” symbol perature conditions are preventing
M83.00-0901-71 is shown on the display screen. activation of the air-conditioning sys-
Press button (6) on the control panel tem.
Once the LED integrated in button Note:
(6) lights up, this indicates that the
If cooling output is inadequate in air-
air-conditioning system is enabled. If
conditioning mode and no malfunction
this symbol appears on the display is indicated on the display screen, you If this symbol appears when you
screen, the air-conditioning system is can activate the ventilation program by press button (6), this indicates that
active (operating). The roof hatches switching off automatic A/C mode. the bus does not have an air-condi-
close automatically whenever the air- tioning system.
conditioning system is activated.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 227


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Activating air-recirculation mode in the driver's area/passenger compartment

Activating air-recirculation mode Activating the reheat function


in the driver's area/passenger Note:
compartment Use this function when driving through
a tunnel, for example. “Smog” mode
is limited to a period of approximately
10 minutes. It is possible to switch the
driver’s area back to fresh-air mode sep-
arately using switch (1); smog mode re-
mains in effect in the passenger compart-
ment. Switch it off by pressing button (7)
(LED off) again.

M83.00-0901-71

Press button (8) on the control panel.


M83.00-0901-71

Press button (7) on the control panel. Note:


The recirculated air (i.e. the reduced
amount of fresh air) is cooled as it comes
into contact with the refrigerant heat ex-
changer and reheated by the heat ex-
This symbol appears on the instru- changer for the heating system. This
ment cluster display screen. The LED process condenses water out of the air
in button (5) lights up. In addition, passed through the system. The air direc-
the roof hatches close automatically. ted to passengers or the driver is thereby
dehumidified.

228 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Activating the auxiliary heating unit

The LED integrated in the pushbutton Activating the auxiliary heating unit
lights up and the roof hatches close
automatically.
If this symbol appears when you
Note: press button (8), this indicates that
Reheat mode is available only if the out- the bus does not have an air-condi-
side temperature is above approximately tioning system.
5 °C. Its operating period is limited to ap-
proximately 30 minutes. To switch it off,
press the reheat button again (LED off).

M83.00-0901-71

Press button (11) on the control pan-


This “Temperature lockout” sym- el.
bol appears on the display screen
if current temperature conditions Danger.
are preventing activation of the air-
conditioning system. If button (6) is Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of
pressed in buses that do not have an fires and burns due to the high exhaust
temperatures and the hot exhaust pipe
air-conditioning system, the “Air-con-
for the auxiliary heating. For this reason,
ditioning system not available” sym- do not stop or park the bus over ignitable
bol is shown on the display screen. materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary
heating is in operation, has recently been
in operation or has been operated by the
instant heating button/preset timer.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 229


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Activating the auxiliary heating unit

Danger. Note:
Risk of poisoning and asphyxiation. The With the ignition starter switch OFF, it
auxiliary heating must not be used in en- is possible to switch the auxiliary heat- If this symbol appears on the display
closed spaces such as garages or work- ing unit on directly by pressing button
screen when button (11) is pressed,
shops due to the risk of poisoning and (11) on the control panel. The LED in
button (11) lights up and the auxiliary this indicates that the bus does not
asphyxiation. Timer and preselection
mode are similarly prohibited. heating is activated. The auxiliary heating have an auxiliary heating unit.
unit switches off automatically after 30
minutes or if the button is pressed again;
the LED in button (11) goes out.
Danger.
Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must The “Temperature lockout” symbol
remain switched off in places where ignit- appears on the display screen if tem-
able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g.
perature conditions are preventing
in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel de-
pots, or coal, sawdust or grain stores or Whenever the auxiliary heating unit the heating system from switching
similar). is active (ignition starter switch po- on.
sition ON), this symbol appears on
the display screen after a time delay
Note: of approximately 20 seconds. The
The integrated LED indicates when the status in effect at the time the ig-
auxiliary heating unit is ready for oper- nition starter switch is switched to
ation (in standby). The auxiliary heating OFF is retained when the ignition is
unit cannot be switched to standby mode switched back on.
unless automatic control has been en-
abled.

230 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times

Programming auxiliary heating


switch-on times Note:
The displayed date and time are imported
from the tachograph and can therefore
only be corrected there.

Briefly press button (10) to change to


setting mode.

Note:
The switch-on times may only be set or
M54.00-2117-71
modified in setting mode.
Screen display in preset timer menu
M83.00-0901-71 (selection mode).
Keep button (10) pressed down until
the preset timer menu is shown on Note:
the display screen. In selection mode, rocker switch (12)
can be used to select P1, P2, P3 or the
switch-on duration.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 231


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Programming auxiliary heating switch-on times

M54.00-2118-71 M54.00-2091-71 M83.00-0901-71

A bar now appears under the time The minutes display can be set with The relevant weekday is selected
display (hours). The hours can now rocker switch (12) when the bar is using button (10) and set or unset
be set using rocker switch (12). (If it shown under the minutes. If it is not using rocker switch (12). (If the
is not necessary to correct the hours, necessary to correct the minutes, it weekday is displayed, it has been
it is possible to move on to change is possible to move on to change the enabled. Weekdays that are not dis-
the minutes by pressing button (10).) weekday by pressing button (10). played have not been enabled.)

Note:
The changes are stored when you press
button (10) on reaching the last weekday
(Sunday). The display reverts to selection
mode automatically and it is now possible
to select the next program (P1, P2, P3).

232 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Activating a programmed auxiliary heating switch-on time

Activating a programmed auxiliary


heating switch-on time Note:
The LED integrated in button (10) indic-
ates whether a switch-on time has been
activated. Steady light for “ignition starter
switch ON”. Flashing for “ignition starter
switch OFF”.

Danger.
Risk of fire and burns. There is a risk of
M54.00-2092-71
fires and burns due to the high exhaust
Screen display when activating the temperatures and the hot exhaust pipe
weekdays. M83.00-0901-71
for the auxiliary heating. For this reason,
do not stop or park the bus over ignitable
Press button (10) briefly and select materials (e.g. grass) when the auxiliary
the relevant storage position (P1, heating is in operation, has recently been
P2 or P3) with rocker switch (12). in operation or has been operated by the
Confirm the selection by pressing instant heating button/preset timer.
button (10).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 233


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Deactivating an activated switch-on time

Deactivating an activated switch-on


Danger. time
Risk of poisoning and asphyxiation. The Briefly press button (10) and se-
auxiliary heating must not be used in en- lect the OFF menu item with rocker
closed spaces such as garages or work- switch (12). Confirm the selection by
shops due to the risk of poisoning and pressing button (10).
asphyxiation. Timer and preselection
mode are similarly prohibited.
Note:
The LED integrated in button (10) goes
Danger. out. No deactivation is possible unless
M54.00-2093-71 the ignition switch is switched on.
Risk of fire. The auxiliary heating must
remain switched off in places where ignit- Screen display when activating the
able vapours or dust can accumulate (e.g. switch-on times.
in the vicinity of filling stations, fuel de- Note:
pots, or coal, sawdust or grain stores or After a program has run its course, it is
similar). necessary to activate the next switch-on
time. For preselection mode, no more
than one switch-on time can be activated.

234 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Programming the auxiliary heating switch-on duration

Programming the auxiliary heating


switch-on duration Note:
The auxiliary heater switch-on duration is
programmed once and then applies for all
switch-on times (P1, P2, P3).

Note:
Recommended switch-on duration: 30 -
40 minutes. A longer switch-on duration
could discharge the vehicle batteries.
M54.00-2117-71

Screen display in preset timer menu


M83.00-0901-71 (selection mode).
Keep button (10) pressed until the Press rocker switch (12) (+ or -)
preset timer menu (selection menu) downwards until the switch-on dur-
is shown on the display screen. ation menu is shown on the display
screen. Briefly press button (10)
to change to setting mode. Rock-
er switch (12) can now be used to
adjust the switch-on duration in the
10-120 minutes range. Confirm the
change by pressing button (10). M54.00-2094-71

Screen display when setting the


switch-on duration.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 235


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area

Switches/controllers in the driver's


rest area

236 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Heating/ventilation/air-conditioning
Switches/controllers in the driver's rest area

Switch for ventilation blower speed


I and II (7) Note:
Warm: turn the controller clockwise.

Note:
When the switch is pressed, the blower Cold: turn the controller anti-clockwise.
for ventilating the driver's rest area oper-
ates at half speed or full speed, depend-
ing on the switch position. Note:
The engine or the water heater must be
Note: running.

The air from vents (1) may be hot or


cold. This depends on the position of
controller (8) and switch position (6).

Heating controller (8)


Manual, infinitely variable adjustment of
the outlet temperature.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 237


238 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
Opening/locking
Table of contents

Door pushbutton in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241


Anti-entrapment protection (reversing) as the doors are closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Protection against entrapment in the door opening direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Locking the exterior emergency valve at door 2 (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Operating/malfunction displays: doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Unlocking the door circuit at the front right door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Unlocking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Unlocking the door circuit using the radio remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the pushbuttons in the driver's area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Locking door 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Locking door 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Locking using the radio remote control (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Central locking system (option) (system description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Operating/malfunction displays: central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 239


Opening/locking
Table of contents

Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply fail-
ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Opening/closing the service cover under the driver's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Opening/closing the roof hatches manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emergency exit through emergency operation of the electric roof hatches (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

240 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Door pushbutton in the driver's area

Door pushbutton in the driver's


area Danger.
Door pushbutton for front right door (I) The doors do not operate if the display
and centre right door (II) (10) with integ- flashes. Do not move the bus if a warn-
rated warning lamps (locator lighting also ing lamp in the door pushbutton lights
ON when Lights ON). up or a yellow or red warning is shown
on the display screen. Otherwise, a red
warning appears on the display screen
Note: and the warning buzzer sounds.
The warning lamp lights up when: - a
door is open - a door is not fully closed
(door not in the catches). Note: M72_00-0332-71

A door cannot be operated unless the


ignition is ON, the bus is stationary and
Note: the doors have been unlocked.
The warning lamp flashes in the follow-
ing situations: - the emergency switch is
activated - the operating pressure is too
low (depressurised bus door) - the door
is open and the speed of the vehicle is
more than 3 km/h - the door malfunc-
tions.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 241


Opening/locking
Anti-entrapment protection (reversing) as the doors are closed

Anti-entrapment protection (revers- Protection against entrapment in


ing) as the doors are closed Danger. the door opening direction
If the door pushbutton for door 1 (front Opening pressure is limited to 4.2 bar
right) is pressed and held for some time, when the doors are being opened. This
the reverse movement may be disabled, ensures that the force used to open the
deactivating the anti-trap function. When door does not exceed that permitted by
the door pushbutton is released, the anti- law.
entrapment protection is reenabled.

Danger.
If an object or a person becomes trapped
during the opening procedure, the door
valve can be changed back to the clos-
ing direction if the door pushbutton is
M72_00-0159-01
pressed again. The door system can also
Reversing switch (7) be depressurised and thus switched to
reduced-power pushback by the use of
The anti-entrapment protection is ac-
the emergency switch.
tivated if a person or object blocks the
door leaf while the door is closing.
In this event, the door leaf is raised and
the cam (7.1) operates the reversing
switch (7).
The door valve changes to Open.

242 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Locking the exterior emergency valve at door 2 (option)

Locking the exterior emergency Operating/malfunction displays:


valve at door 2 (option) doors
Door open
Note:
If a bus without central locking is to be
parked and left, it is possible to lock
the emergency valve for door 2 from the
outside (option). In this event, only the
emergency valve is locked. This icon appears if a door is still open
or if a door is not closed properly (door
not latched).
M72_00-0284-71
Note:
Lock the emergency valve. Note:
If the bus is to be left for a relatively long
period, it is necessary to lock the door It is no longer possible to operate Symbol is an example for door I (front
from the inside. The door will then re- the emergency valve, and unauthor- right door).
main closed, even in the event of a loss ised access to the bus is prevented.
of pressure. Door malfunction warning - door I
Unlock the emergency valve again (front right) or door II (centre right)
before commencing a journey.

Note:
The drive-off lock remains active if the ex-
terior emergency valve has not been un-
A malfunction is present in the door sys-
locked before commencing a journey. It
is not possible to set the bus in motion.
tem if this icon appears on the display
screen while the bus is in motion or sta-
tionary. At the same time, a RED warn-

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 243


Opening/locking
Operating/malfunction displays: doors

ing level malfunction message is dis-


played, the warning lamp in the door Danger. Note:
pushbutton flashes and the warning If the bus is equipped with a bus stop
This icon also appears when the emer-
buzzer sounds. gency valve on the inside/outside of the brake (option), this icon appears when the
front right or centre right door is oper- bus stop brake pushbutton is pressed.
Danger. ated (door depressurised).

Stop the bus immediately (traffic condi-


Note:
tions permitting). It is prohibited to move
the bus at any time while this malfunction Danger. If the bus is equipped with a drive-off
is present. Have an OMNIplus Service This icon also appears in the display if lock, this icon will appear when the
Partner check the door system immedi- the bus is moving faster than 3 km/h centre right door has completely closed
ately. and door I (front right) or door II (centre following a closing procedure.
right) is open.

Danger. Note:
This display also appears if the Note: The bus stop brake and the drive-off
compressed-air supply in the door system Symbol is an example for door I (front lock are applied on all axles with re-
is too low. Start the bus and charge the right door). duced braking pressure and are released
compressed-air supply. If the display still as soon as the accelerator pedal is de-
does not go out, have the door system Ready to depart pressed.
checked by an OMNIplus Service Partner.

This icon appears in connection with the


bus stop brake or drive-off lock.

244 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Unlocking the door circuit at the front right door

Unlocking the door circuit at the


Danger. front right door Note:
The bus may roll away if the parking The fuel filler flaps are unlocked when
brake has not been applied. Danger. door 1 is unlocked.

All doors must be unlocked before the


bus is driven off.
Danger.
Door 2 is not unlocked at the same time.

Door 1 opens automatically.

M72_00-0244-01

To unlock the front right door, insert


the key into lock (1), turn it clock-
wise and turn handle (2) to the right
at the same time (arrow position 3).
Turn the key and handle (2) back to
their initial position and remove the
key. Press exterior pushbutton (5).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 245


Opening/locking
Unlocking door 2

Unlocking door 2 Unlocking the door circuit using the


radio remote control (option) Note:
If a door or luggage compartment flap is
Danger. not opened within 20 seconds, the cir-
cuit will be relocked. This prevents the
All doors must be unlocked before the bus from remaining unlocked if it was
bus is driven off. unlocked by accident. Forced locking is
initiated to conserve the battery charge if
the luggage compartment flaps have still
not been locked within 43 minutes of the
ignition switch being switched to OFF.

M72_00-0188-01

Turn interior handle (2) for door 2 to


the left.

Danger.
Door 2 must be unlocked manually before
M82_00-0106-71
the bus is driven off.
Unlock door circuit (door I, door II,
fuel filler flaps) using the remote con-
trol (button 1).
Unlocking of the door circuit is indic-
ated by one long flash (maximum of
3 seconds) of the side-mounted turn
signals.

246 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the pushbuttons in the driver's area

Unlocking the luggage compartment


flaps using the pushbuttons in the Note: Note:
driver's area If the bus is equipped with central locking The luggage compartment lighting
(option), the side-mounted turn signals switches on automatically whenever a
flash briefly once (for approximately 1 luggage compartment flap circuit (left or
second) when the luggage compartment right) is unlocked.
flaps are locked and unlocked.

The left- or right-side luggage com-


partment flaps can be opened. The
LEDs in pushbuttons (5) and (6) light
up when the luggage compartment
flaps are unlocked.

Note:
M82_00-0007-01

Unlock the left-side luggage compart- There must be sufficient compressed air
available.
ment flaps using pushbutton (5) and
the right-side flaps using pushbutton
(6).
Note:
The luggage compartment flaps are re-
locked either when the pushbutton in the
driver’s area is pressed again or when the
ignition switch is turned to OFF.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 247


Opening/locking
Unlocking the luggage compartment flaps using the remote control (option)

Unlocking the luggage compartment responding luggage compartment Locking door 2


flaps using the remote control flaps pushbutton in the driver's area Close door 2
(option) depending on which side of the bus
the luggage compartments are un-
locked).

Note:
There must be sufficient compressed air
available.

M72_00-0188-01
M82_00-0106-71
To lock door 2, insert the key into
Unlock the left-side luggage compart- lock (2.1), turn it clockwise and turn
ment flaps using remote control but- interior handle (2) to the right at the
ton 2 and the right-side flaps using same time. Then turn the key back
button 3. to its initial position and remove it
with the handle in the locked posi-
Note: tion.
The turn signals flash (approximately 1
second) once if only the luggage compart-
ment flaps have been locked or unlocked.

Luggage compartment flaps can be


opened (the LED lights up in the cor-

248 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Locking door 1

Locking door 1
Note: Close door 1 Note:
Do not turn handle (2) back again, other- The fuel filler flaps are locked when door
wise you will unlock the door again. 1 is locked.

Note:
Door 2 has to be locked separately.

M72_00-0244-01

To lock the front right door, insert


the key into lock (1), turn it clock-
wise and turn handle (2) to the left
(arrow position 4). Turn the key and
handle (2) back to their initial posi-
tion and remove the key.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 249


Opening/locking
Locking using the radio remote control (option)

Locking using the radio remote


control (option) Note: Note:
Close the doors The side-mounted turn signals flash briefly A buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an at-
3 times (approximately 1 second) to con- tempt is made to lock the bus and the
firm that the bus is locked. bus doors, luggage compartment flaps,
roof hatches or driver's window have not
been closed and locked.
Note:
If the key is used in the lock on the front
right door in order to lock the bus, only Note:
the door circuit will be locked, i.e. any The luggage compartment flaps can also
unlocked luggage compartment flaps will be locked or unlocked using two pushbut-
not be locked by this action. tons in the driver's area when the ignition
switch is switched on.

M82_00-0106-71
Note:
When the radio remote control (but- Note:
The driver's window and service covers
ton 1) is pressed, the bus is locked
are neither closed nor locked automatic- When the ignition switch is switched to
centrally, i.e. door and luggage com- ally; these have to be closed or locked OFF and the luggage compartment flaps
partment flap circuits are locked. manually. are unlocked and closed, forced locking
occurs after 43 minutes to conserve the
battery charge.

250 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Central locking system (option) (system description)

Central locking system (option) Relocking of the bus after inadvertent


(system description) unlocking using the FFB.
The central locking system may offer the Forced locking of the luggage com-
This icon on the screen (driver's following range of functions: partment flaps to conserve battery
area) indicates that a luggage com- charge.
Complete locking of the open bus
partment flap has not been closed using the radio remote control (FFB)
correctly. with the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Danger. Unlocking of the door circuit (front
Before the bus is driven off, carry out a right door, centre right door, fuel
visual inspection to make absolutely sure filler flaps) using the remote control.
that all luggage compartment flaps and Unlocking/locking of the door circuit
service covers are properly closed. using the lock on the front right door
with the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Unlocking/locking of the luggage M72_00-0244-01
compartment flaps using the FFB Locking/unlocking of the doors: It is
with the ignition switch in the ON or possible to lock or unlock the door cir-
OFF position. cuit (front right door, centre right door,
Unlocking/locking of the luggage fuel filler flaps) electrically by means
compartment flaps using rocker of lock (1) on the front right door or
switch on the instrument panel with by pressing button (1) on the radio re-
the ignition switch in the ON or OFF mote control (FFB). A locking of the door
position. circuit using the FFB is always accom-
panied by a simultaneous locking of the

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 251


Opening/locking
Central locking system (option) (system description)

vehicle's entire central locking system. signals flash once (1 second) whenever
Unlocking of the doors is indicated by the FFB is used to lock or unlock the
a long flash (maximum 3 seconds) from luggage compartment flaps.
the side-mounted turn signals. When the
door circuit is unlocked, the doorway
lighting in the front right door comes on
for a maximum of 30 seconds. It goes
out if the ignition switch is switched to
ON or if the doors are locked. Complete
locking of the bus is indicated by the
side-mounted turn signals flashing (1
second) three times. A locked door cir- M82_00-0106-71

cuit is unlocked automatically when the Locking/unlocking of the luggage com-


engine is started. partment flaps: The left and right-side
luggage compartment flaps can be M82_00-0007-01
locked or unlocked separately using FFB
Locking/unlocking of the luggage com-
button (2) or (3). This is possible when
partment flaps (continued): With the igni-
the ignition switch is in the OFF or ON
tion switch in the ON position, the flaps
position or when the engine is running.
on the left-hand side and the flaps on
If the unlock command was issued using
the right-hand side can be electropneu-
the FFB, a flap must be opened within
matically locked or unlocked separ-
20 seconds otherwise the bus will be
ately using rocker switch (5) and rocker
locked again automatically. The LEDs
switch (6) respectively. The LED in the
light up in the rocker switches in the
pressed rocker switch lights up when the
driver's station. The LEDs in the rocker
luggage compartment flap circuit is un-
switches go out if the doors are locked
locked. Status message for the driver:
using the FFB. The side-mounted turn
LED lit - luggage compartment flaps un-

252 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Central locking system (option) (system description)

locked. LED not lit - luggage compart- ment lighting is also switched off auto- the side-mounted turn signals flashing
ment flaps locked. A symbol is shown matically after no more than 43 minutes 3 times (1 second). Change the radio
on the instrument cluster display screen (forced locking). remote control's battery if its operating
if a luggage compartment flap is open. range appears to be deteriorating.
The luggage compartment flap circuit
can be locked even if a luggage compart- Environmental protection
ment flap is open. The luggage compart-
ment flap that was still open will also be Dispose of used batteries in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
locked once it is closed.
Security functions of the central lock-
Danger. ing system: Relocking - relocking is a
security feature of the central locking.
Before the bus is driven off, carry out a
visual inspection to make absolutely sure If the unlocking button on the FFB is
that all luggage compartment flaps and pressed inadvertently, the bus will be
service covers are properly closed. M82_00-0106-71 relocked automatically if none of the
Complete locking of the bus: To have all doors or luggage compartment flaps are
Luggage compartment lighting opera- parts of the bus locked simultaneously, opened within 20 seconds. Forced lock-
tion: The luggage compartment lighting it is necessary to use the FFB. To do ing - forced locking only affects luggage
is switched on if a luggage compartment so, press button (1) on the FFB. If the compartment flaps that have been un-
flap circuit (left or right) is unlocked and door circuit is already locked, it is not locked by the central locking system.
at least one of the luggage compartment possible to centrally lock the entire bus Forced locking is initiated (the solenoid
flaps is open. directly using the FFB. At first, only the valves are deactivated to reduce the off-
The luggage compartment lighting is door circuit is unlocked when button load current in the system) if the luggage
switched off again when all luggage com- (1) on the FFB is pressed for the first compartment flaps have still not been
partment flaps are closed or both lug- time; the complete bus is not locked locked after more than 43 minutes with
gage compartment flap circuits (left and until button (1) is pressed once more. the ignition switched OFF.
right) are locked. The luggage compart- Complete locking is acknowledged by

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 253


Opening/locking
Operating/malfunction displays: central locking

Operating/malfunction displays:
central locking Note: Note:
Central locking of the left-side Only in buses without central locking (ZV) This symbol also appears if the supply of
luggage compartment flaps (option). compressed air in the right-side luggage
compartment flap circuit is too low - start
Central locking of the right-side the bus and charge the compressed-air
luggage compartment flaps supply.

This symbol is displayed on the screen if Note:


the left-side luggage compartment flaps Only in buses without central locking (ZV)
are unlocked using the pushbutton in (option).
This symbol is displayed on the screen
the driver's area and no feedback is re-
if the right-side luggage compartment Luggage compartment flap open
ceived from the pressure switch within
flaps are unlocked using the pushbutton (option)
3 seconds. In this case, there is a fault
in the driver's area and no feedback is
in the left-side luggage compartment
received from the pressure switch within
flap circuit and it may not be possible to
3 seconds. In this case, there is a fault
open the luggage compartment flaps.
in the right-side luggage compartment
flap circuit and it may not be possible to
Note: open the luggage compartment flaps. This symbol appears on the screen if
This symbol also appears if the supply of one or more luggage compartment flaps
compressed air in the left-side luggage or service covers have not been locked
compartment flap circuit is too low - start correctly.
the bus and charge the compressed-air
supply.

254 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves)

Emergency operation of the doors


Danger. (depressurising the doors using the
Before the bus is driven off, carry out a emergency valves)
visual inspection to make absolutely sure
that all luggage compartment flaps and Danger.
service covers are properly closed.
All doors must remain unlocked while the
bus is in motion. - refer to Operating In-
structions sections: “Opening/Locking”,
Note: “Unlocking the door circuit at the front
Only in buses with central locking (ZV) right door / Unlocking the centre right
(option) or luggage compartment flap door / Unlocking the door circuit using
M72_00-0023-01
warning display (option). the radio remote control (option)”
Remove the security seal from the
emergency valve.

Note:
3 Exterior emergency valve, front right
door

Note:
3.1 Interior emergency valve, front right
door

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 255


Opening/locking
Emergency operation of the doors (depressurising the doors using the emergency valves)

Provide the emergency valve with a


Note: new security seal.
3.2 Exterior emergency valve, centre right
door The warning buzzer sounds in the
driver's area. The red warning lamp
in the relevant door pushbutton must
Note: flash. This symbol appears on the
3.3 Interior emergency valve, centre right instrument cluster display screen
door together with a red alert.
Turn interior emergency valve Restoring operation of the door sys-
(3.1/3.3) or exterior emergency valve tem: - move the emergency valve
(3/3.2) in the direction of the arrow. into the normal position – the door
compressed-air system is slowly
Note: refilled through a door actuation
throttle valve and returns to the con-
When the emergency valve is operated,
dition it was in before the emergency
the door valve is vented of air. At the
same time, the emergency valve also re- valve was operated.
leases the air in the door system. The
door system is now depressurised and it Danger.
must now be possible to move the door
manually. Risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is
within the sweep of the door leaf when
operation of the door system is restored.
Doors must not move with a jerky or
jolting action after normal operation has
been restored.

256 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Emergency unlocking of the luggage compartment flaps in the event of a compressed-air supply failure

Emergency unlocking of the luggage


compartment flaps in the event of a
compressed-air supply failure

Note:
If there has been a complete failure of
the central compressed-air supply and
the electrical power supply, the luggage
compartment flaps can be emergency-un-
locked by means of an emergency oper-
ating facility (spare wheel compressed-air
reserve). M00_00-0084-01 M40_00-0073-01

Open the front cover of the bus us- Take the hose with tyre connection
ing lever (1) at the front right door (2) from the plate behind the heat-
entrance ing front cabinet and connect it to
the tyre inflation valve on the spare
Remove the spare wheel
wheel.

Note:
The spare wheel has a pressure of ap-
proximately 8 bar. The compressed air in
the spare wheel passes through shuttle
valves to the cylinders of the luggage
compartment locking system and un-
locks the luggage compartment flaps. The
luggage compartment flaps can then be
opened.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 257


Opening/locking
Opening/closing the service cover under the driver's window

Opening/closing the service cover


Note: under the driver's window Note:
Reinflate the spare wheel to the specified Handle (1) is located on the floor of the
pressure as soon as possible. bus to the left-hand side of the driver's
seat.

The service cover is released.

M00.00-0591-71

To release: to release the service


cover, pull handle (1).

Danger.
M00.00-0655-71
Do not pull the release lever while the To open: open service cover (1) to-
vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the ser- wards you.
vice cover could open.

258 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Opening/closing the roof hatches manually

To close: close service cover (1) with Opening/closing the roof hatches To close the roof hatches, pull handle
a gentle push. manually (1).

Danger. Danger.
When you close the service cover, there There is a risk of injury and entrapment if
is a risk of injury from entrapment. parts of the body (fingers) are in the area
of movement of the roof hatches.
You should hear the service cover
engage. Check whether the service To open the roof hatch in an emer-
cover has engaged correctly. gency, remove emergency hammer
(2) from the bracket and strike the
glass.

M77_00-0020-71 Note:
Open the roof hatch to the front or The emergency hammer must only be
rear of the bus manually using handle used in an emergency and with the bus
(1). stationary.

Note:
The roof hatches can be moved into the
air-in or air-out position.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 259


Opening/locking
Emergency exit through emergency operation of the electric roof hatches (option)

Emergency exit through emer-


gency operation of the electric roof
hatches (option)

Danger.
The emergency release is only for use
in an emergency and when the bus is
stationary.

Note: M77_00-0017-01 M77_00-0016-01


Both emergency exits (front and rear roof Remove cover (1) by pulling on Emergency operation is initiated by
hatches) are unlocked as soon as the bus handle (2) (Velcro fastener) to gain means of a red exterior or interior
is unlocked by the central locking system,
access to the emergency exit roof twist handle (1).
the lock at door 1 is unlocked or whenev-
er the ignition starter switch is switched
hatch.
to ON. They are relocked as soon as Note:
the ignition starter switch is switched to In emergencies, interior twist handle (1)
OFF and the bus is locked by the central must be turned in the direction of the
locking system or the lock at door 1 is arrow (clockwise). The emergency exit
locked. cover (2) can now be secured by a safety
rope and placed to one side outside the
bus.

260 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


Opening/locking
Emergency exit through emergency operation of the electric roof hatches (option)

This symbol appears on the driver's


area display screen in the event of
emergency operation or if an outside
handle on one of the emergency exit
roof hatches is in locked condition
with the ignition starter switch ON.

Danger.
Following emergency operation of an
emergency exit roof hatch, it is neces-
sary to have the cover fitted by specialist
personnel at an OMNIplus Service Part-
ner.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 261


262 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB
On-board kitchenette
Table of contents

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266


Instructions for operating a microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Use for the intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
First use of the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Switching on the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Checking and cleaning the fresh water filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Drawing water from the water tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Switching on the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Descaling the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Switching on the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Cleaning the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Descaling the sausage heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 263


On-board kitchenette
Table of contents

Brewing coffee in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287


Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Switching on the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 cups of coffee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Manual operation of the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Descaling the coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Draining the fresh water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Draining the water lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Draining the boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Draining the 40-cup coffee machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Draining the 2-carafe filter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Draining the siphon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

264 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Table of contents

Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Restoring boiler operation following a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Using the 40-cup coffee machine again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Using the 2-carafe filter system again after a malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Other malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Switching off the galley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 265


On-board kitchenette
General information

General information
Note: Note:
It is advisable to disinfect water-carrying Waste water from the galley flows into
systems at regular intervals or after oper- the lavatory's holding tank.
Caution:
ation has been restored. A sodium hypo-
Never operate the equipment without wa- chloride solution (from camping and cara-
ter. Risk of thermal damage - loss of war- vanning retailers) is particularly suitable; Environmental protection
ranty. observe the manufacturer's instructions.
Dispose of waste in an environmentally
responsible manner. The rules and regu-
Danger. lations of the country in which the vehicle
Caution:
is operated must be observed.
To avoid the risk of fire and damage, it Do not use the coffee machine, water
is prohibited to store anything inside the boiler or sausage heater unless the kit-
sausage heater or microwave oven. chenette is open. Damage caused by
heat and steam when the kitchenette is
closed is not covered by the warranty.
Danger.
Use only clean drinking water.
Danger.
Secure loose objects in the kitchenette
Danger. (cans, cups, lids, etc.) properly during the
journey.
To prevent the growth of microbes in wa-
ter left inside the system, the entire sys-
tem must be drained (refer to “Winter
operation”) if the galley and/or lavatory is
to remain out of service temporarily.

266 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Instructions for operating a microwave oven

Instructions for operating a dangerous microwave energy may


microwave oven Danger. escape.
Microwaves only heat up foods contain- Do not bridge the door safety circuit.
ing water; this means that the container Do not place any objects between
may feel cold but the food inside could the microwave oven door and the
Caution:
be boiling hot. To eliminate the risk of oven interior, keep the door seals
Never use the oven when it is empty. burns, the temperature of the food must
Place at least one glass of water in the
clean.
therefore be checked before the food is
oven if you want to carry out a test. No served. This applies to the preparation of Do not use the oven if it is faulty.
metal objects should be placed in the food for children or babies in particular. Only allow the microwave oven to be
oven interior as this would result in spark- repaired by a specialist workshop.
ing and damage to the oven.
All openings on the microwave oven
Danger. (ventilation in and out) must be free.
Danger. The rules below for handling microwave Never allow children to use the mi-
ovens must be adhered to in order to crowave oven unless they are super-
Living animals or body parts must not be reduce the risk of microwaves causing
exposed to microwaves.
vised.
burning, electric shocks, radiation and
fire: To reduce the risk of fire in the oven
interior: foodstuffs must never be
Danger. overheated, binding wires must be
removed from paper or plastic pack-
To reduce the risk of a fire breaking out Only use suitable containers. A con- aging.
as a consequence of overheated food, the tainer is suitable for use in the mi-
microwave oven must never be operated crowave oven if it remains cold after Do not heat popcorn in the mi-
without supervision. If food catches fire, having been heated in the oven for crowave oven unless you do this
switch the microwave oven off but do not
one minute at maximum power. using a popcorn insert or use special
open the oven doors. popcorn.
Do not operate the microwave oven
with the door open, it is possible that

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 267


On-board kitchenette
Instructions for operating a microwave oven

Only use thermometers recommen- Foodstuffs in skins, such as potatoes,


ded for use in microwave ovens to sausages, tomatoes, chicken livers Danger.
measure the temperature of food- and other offal, eggs, etc., should be
When liquids (water) are heated in the mi-
stuffs in the oven. pierced so that steam generated by crowave oven, and especially reheated,
Our instructions must be closely fol- cooking can escape. it can sometimes happen that the boil-
lowed when cooking pork. The meat Microwaveable bags and sealed ing temperature has been reached but
must be heated to at least 70 °C plastic bags should be cut open or the typical steam bubbles do not initially
so that any bacteria that may be pierced to prevent them exploding form. The liquid does not boil uniformly.
present will definitely be destroyed. during cooking and possibly causing When the container is removed (shaken)
this boiling delay, as it is called, can sud-
Frozen drinks contained in narrow- injuries. Plastic containers should
denly cause steam bubbles to form and
necked bottles, especially carbonated be opened at least a small amount. therefore start to boil over suddenly - risk
drinks, must not be defrosted in the After containers have been cooked of scalding. To prevent this, it is neces-
microwave oven. Pressure can form while they were sealed with plastic sary to place a glass rod in the container,
even in open containers with the ef- foil, the cover must be removed in for instance. The glass rod ensures that
fect that the container may explode such a way that escaping steam does fluid in the container boils uniformly and
and cause injuries. not come into contact with the hands therefore the steam bubbles form at the
or face. usual time.
Foodstuffs must not be overcooked.
If, for instance, potatoes are over-
cooked they can dry out and become
The microwave oven must not be
a fire risk.
used to dry paper (newspapers).
Cooking of eggs (in or not in a shell) They can catch fire if overheated.
in the microwave oven cannot be re-
commended. The pressure in the egg
yolk could cause the egg to explode
and cause injuries.

268 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Use for the intended purpose

Use for the intended purpose Approved personnel


Note: The galley and its equipment are inten- The kitchenette may only be used by
Clean microwave ovens after they have ded for normal kitchen use during a bus trained personnel. The personnel must
been used with a commercially available journey. This includes: be professionally qualified and have read
washing detergent, do not use abrasive and understood this section.
cleaner. Switch off the ignition when do-
ing this. If it is necessary to clean dried- The safety of the person using the kit-
Boiler for hot water preparation
on food residue from the oven interior, chenette and the security of all kitchen
Coffee machine for brewing coffee utensils are prerequisites for use of the
it can be softened by placing a glass of
water in the oven and boiling it for ap- Sausage heater for preparing saus- kitchenette while the bus is in motion.
proximately 10 minutes. ages
Any other use cannot be considered use Danger.
for the intended purpose. Objects being thrown out of the kit-
chenette can cause injuries. The person
using the kitchenette must secure loose
objects safely while the bus is in motion.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 269


On-board kitchenette
First use of the galley

First use of the galley Press button (4) on the control panel
Galley switched on and keep it pressed (yellow LED (6)
flashes) until green LED (5) lights up.
Fresh water tank filled and connec-
ted The boiler has been filled and bled
All packaging materials must be re- and can now be switched on using
moved before the galley is used for control button (9) to draw hot water.
the first time. All utensils must be
thoroughly cleaned and rinsed in Note:
fresh water. To avoid scale and steam, do not turn
control knob (9) to maximum temperature
Environmental protection unless you need very hot water.

Dispose of the packaging material in an Before first use, clean the sausage
environmentally responsible manner. heater tank, the lid and the overflow
pipe thoroughly with hot water and
a commercially available washing up
liquid, and then rinse well with clean
water. Then wipe the sausage heater
tank dry to avoid scaling.
To clean the coffee machine, fill
it with water and brew the water
without coffee powder but with the
M86_00-0375-73 filter holder fitted, then repeat.
The galley is ready for use.

270 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the galley

Switching on the galley


Note:
Note: The lower and middle covers can now be
used as a counter.
The coffee machine, boiler, sausage heat-
er and microwave oven cannot be oper-
ated unless the engine is running.

M86_00-0140-01

Release folding cover on lock (2.1)


by unlocking and pressing it. Pull
handle (2.2). Fold the upper part of
the folding cover down by handle
(2.3).

M86_00-0058-01 Danger.
Press galley master switch (1). Since the counter protrudes into the
The LED in master switch (1) lights steps area, the kitchenette should be
up. switched off and closed before passen-
gers embark or disembark. Risk of injury.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 271


On-board kitchenette
Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus

Switch on the galley lighting using Filling the fresh water tank inside
button (2) on the galley control pan- the bus
el.
The LEDs of the galley lighting come
on and indicator lamp (3) lights up.
The galley is open and ready for use.

Note:
If indicator lamp (3) on the control panel
does not light up, there is insufficient on-
board voltage to operate the kitchenette.
Start the engine to enable the batteries
to recharge.

M86_00-0142-02

Fill fresh water tank (4) via cap (4.1).

M86_00-0375-73

272 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Filling the fresh water tank inside the bus

Danger. Note: Note:


The kitchenette must be operated using Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficult Waste water from the kitchenette flows
clean and potable water only. Fresh wa- to turn. into the lavatory's holding tank.
ter for kitchenette requirements must be
renewed every day. If the fresh water is
stored in the water tank for a long peri- Note:
od of time, an additive (Micropur, mat.
In new buses, the drinking water
no. 0.971.407.000) in accordance with
may sometimes taste of plastic. An
the manufacturer's instructions must be
additive (Kunststoff-Frisch, mat. no.
mixed with it.
0.971.405.000) can be mixed in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions
to neutralise this aftertaste.
Danger.
The tools used to fill with water (contain-
ers, funnels, hoses, etc.) must be sterile. Note:
The fresh water tank is located in the
luggage compartment in front of the lav-
Note: atory, and in the right-hand luggage com-
It is recommended that fresh water tank partment to the rear of the driven axle on
(4) be cleaned manually via caps (4.1) earlier bus models.
and (4.2) and/or that it be flushed thor-
oughly with fresh water. The fresh water
lines should then also be flushed with
fresh water by drawing cold/hot water
and switching on the coffee machine.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 273


On-board kitchenette
Filling the fresh water tank outside the bus

Filling the fresh water tank outside Release tensioning straps (4.4). Re- Checking and cleaning the fresh
the bus move fresh water tank (4). water filter
Fill fresh water tank (4) with pure
drinking water via cap (4.2). Close
cap (4.2) firm and tight.
Fit fresh water tank (4) into the bus
and secure using tensioning straps
(4.4).
Connect quick-release coupling (5) to
fresh water tank (4).

M86_00-0376-71

The fresh water filter is located be-


hind cover (2). Unscrew knurled
screws (1) to permit removal of the
cover.

M86_00-0142-02

Disconnect quick-release coupling (5)


from fresh water tank (4).

274 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Drawing water from the water tap

Drawing water from the water tap Open rotary knob (5) to draw hot
Galley switched on water from tap (7).
Fresh water tank filled and connec-
ted Danger.
Outflow of hot water - danger of scalding.

Note:
No hot water can be drawn unless the
M86_00-0143-01 boiler is in operation. It takes approxim-
ately 20 minutes for the water to heat up
Check fresh water filter (6) for clog-
to a set temperature of 80 °C.
ging at regular intervals (depending
on the water quality) and clean it if
necessary.
M86_00-0377-71 Note:
Open rotary knob (6) to draw cold Opening both rotary knobs (5) and (6)
Note: draws a mixture of hot and cold water.
water from tap (7).
The fresh water filter is located between
the fresh water tank and the fresh water
pump.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 275


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the boiler

Switching on the boiler Before you switch on the boiler,


Galley switched on press and hold button (4) until green
LED (5) lights up in order to make
Fresh water tank filled and connec-
sure that the boiler contains water.
ted
The boiler has been filled with water
and bled.
Caution:
There is a risk of overheating and thermal To switch on the boiler, turn control
damage if the boiler is operated with no knob (9) clockwise.
water. Never operate the boiler without
Green LED (8) above control knob (9)
water.
lights up and the water is heated.

Note:
The boiler switches off when you turn
control knob (9) back. Green LED (8)
goes out.

Note:
If red LED (7) lights up, the boiler has
overheated and must be switched off
by turning control knob (9) fully anti-
clockwise (position 0) until the boiler has
M86_00-0375-73
cooled down.

The boiler heats up the water and


automatically switches off when the

276 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Descaling the boiler

temperature set at the control knob Descaling the boiler Disconnect the hose at quick-release
has been reached. LED (8) goes out. coupling (5).

Note: Note:
The boiler has a capacity of approximately How frequently the galley should be de-
5 litres and it takes approximately 20 scaled depends on the water quality but
minutes for the water to heat up to a set the boiler should be descaled immediately
temperature of 80 °C. if there is a noticeable increase in the
length of the heating phase. It is advis-
able to descale the boiler twice a year.

Hold the hose in a container of de-


scaler (at least 10 litres).

Note:
Use only descalers that are suitable for
domestic appliances. The descaler must
be non-aggressive to plastics and alumini-
um. Observe the information provided by
M86_00-0142-02 the manufacturer.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 277


On-board kitchenette
Descaling the boiler

Press and hold pushbutton (4) until


Note: green LED (5) lights up.
Fully drain the boiler descaling. The boiler has been filled with de-
scaler.
To switch on the boiler, turn control
knob (9) fully clockwise (position 3).
LED (8) lights up and the water con-
taining descaler is heated.
Wait until LED (8) goes out.
The contents of the boiler have been
heated.

Note:
The boiler has a capacity of approximately
5 litres and it takes approximately 20
minutes for the water to heat up to a set
temperature of 80 °C.

Drain the water and descaler by


opening tap (5).

M86_00-0375-73

278 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the sausage heater

Flush the boiler with plenty of fresh Switching on the sausage heater
water. To do this, fill the boiler with Galley switched on
fresh water, heat the water and drain
Fresh water tank filled and connec-
it.
ted

Note:
Danger.
Repeat the last step until the water no
longer tastes or smells of descaler or vin- There is a risk of scalding when using
egar. the sausage heater. Hot steam can rise,
which may cause serious burns to the
face, arms and hands. Keep at a safe
distance, and remove hot sausages using
only heat-resistant kitchen utensils.

Note:
The length of the heating phase depends
on the amount of water, the number of
M86_00-0142-02 sausages and the temperature of the wa-
Connect the hose to fresh water tank ter used to fill the boiler.
(4).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 279


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the sausage heater

Fill the sausage heater tank half full


Note: (approximately 2 - 3 litres) with cold
The sausage heater has a capacity of 8.5 or hot water.
litres. Add the sausages to the sausage
heater tank and replace the lid on
the sausage heater tank.
Note:
Waste water from the galley flows into Note:
the lavatory's holding tank.
When adding sausages, there is a risk of
hot water splashing and causing burns
M86_00-0149-01 to the face, arms and hands. Add the
sausages to the water carefully and keep
Insert overflow pipe (12) into the dis-
a safe distance.
charge hole, ensuring leak-tightness.

Danger.
Never use the sausage heater without
water.

Note:
Excess water may run out via overflow
pipe (12).

280 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the sausage heater

Switch on the sausage heater by


turning control knob (10).
Green LED (12) lights up during the
heating phase.

Note:
If red LED (11) lights up, the sausage
heater has overheated and must be
switched off by turning the control knob
fully anti-clockwise (position 0) until the
heater has cooled down. M86_00-0149-01

At the end of the heating phase, re-


move the lid.

Danger.
The sausage heater is hot and generates
steam - risk of scalding. Do not remove
overflow pipe (12) until the water in the
tank has cooled sufficiently that there is
no longer a risk of scalding.

Take out the sausages using tongs


M86_00-0375-73 or a suitable heat-resistant kitchen
utensil.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 281


On-board kitchenette
Cleaning the sausage heater

Cleaning the sausage heater Descaling the sausage heater


After use, clean the sausage heater Fill the sausage heater tank 2 cm
tank, the lid and the overflow pipe high with descaler.
with warm water and a commer-
Leave the descaler to work (observe
cially available washing up liquid.
the information issued by the manu-
Use a soft sponge without a scour-
facturer).
er or similar abrasive product. Rinse
with clean water and wipe the saus-
age heater tank dry to avoid scaling. Note:
Clean the overflow pipe with bottle For heavy scaling, it is possible to operate
cleaner at regular intervals. the sausage heater containing descaler
M86_00-0149-01 for approximately 30 minutes at 80 °C.
The water in the sausage heater tank
Note: Drain the boiler after the descaler re-
can be drained as soon as the water
has been allowed to cool down. To Clean the sausage heater tank with a action time and rinse well with clean
do this, remove overflow pipe (12) commercially available stainless steel water. Wipe the sausage heater tank
from the discharge hole. cleaner at regular intervals. dry.

282 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine

Switching on the 40-cup coffee


machine
Galley switched on
Fresh water tank filled and connec-
ted

Note:
There is a risk of scalding when serving
hot drinks. There is a risk of serious
burns. Do not pour the coffee until it is
safe to do so. M86_00-0377-71 M86_00-0010-01

Pulling release handle (3) up makes it Pivot the 40-cup coffee machine out
possible to pivot the coffee machine of the galley. Close residual drain
Danger. out of the kitchenette valve (24) and tap (23).
Do not switch on the coffee machine un-
less its tank has been filled with water -
risk of overheating.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 283


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine

M86_00-0008-01 M86_00-0010-01 M86_00-0378-71

Open the lid. Turn lock ring (17) anti- Remove lock ring (17) and lid (18) Open tap (1) to fill the 40-cup coffee
clockwise and unlock it. and take out filter holder (19). machine with water.
Pivot the 40-cup coffee machine into
the galley until it engages.
Note:
The minimum amount of water to fill the
40-cup coffee machine is the equivalent
of 10 cups. The maximum amount of
water is the equivalent of 40 cups. The
number of cups is indicated at water level
glass (21).

284 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine

M86_00-0010-01 M86_00-0008-01 M86_00-0010-01

Insert the filter paper into filter hold- Position lid (18) and lock ring (17) Switch on the 40-cup coffee machine
er (19) and fill filter holder (19) with on top and engage by turning anti- using rocker switch (22). The brew-
the required amount of coffee (1 clockwise: ing process begins.
mark ring = 10 cups).
Note: Danger.
Note: Lug (17.1) must be positioned over water Whilst coffee is being brewed, steam es-
You can also use the machine without level glass (21). capes from the openings in the lid. Do
paper if the coffee has not been ground not open the lid when the coffee machine
too fine. is switched on.

Close filter holder (19) and lid (18)


and place it on the riser pipe in the
machine.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 285


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the 40-cup coffee machine

Push tap (23) down to pour coffee.


Note: Lock it in the vertical position for
Indicator lamp (22.1) lights up when the continuous pouring.
coffee has finished brewing.
Note:
Lock the tap in the vertical position for
Note: continuous pouring.
The coffee is kept warm as long as rock-
er switch (22) has not been switched off. Switch off rocker switch (22) if there
is no more coffee in the coffee ma-
chine or no more coffee is needed.
Note:
Do not switch off the coffee machine dur-
ing the keep-warm phase because a new
brewing process would begin when the
machine were switched back on - coffee
quality would be degraded.

M86_00-0159-02

Drain off the remaining coffee with


residual drain valve (24).

286 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Brewing coffee in winter

Brewing coffee in winter Cleaning the 40-cup coffee machine


Galley switched on
Caution:
Operation of the 40-cup coffee machine Note:
in winter is permitted only once it has Regular cleaning after each use ensures
been established that the interior of the optimum coffee quality and full taste.
kitchenette is not frozen, otherwise there
is a risk of damage. The interior com-
Clean the filter holder using a com-
partment of the bus should be heated for
some time beforehand.
mercially available washing up liquid
and a brush. Do not use a descaler
M86_00-0010-01 when cleaning the filter holder.
Remove lid (18) and filter holder (19). Clean the inside of the riser pipe of
Use a suitable vessel to fill water into the 40-cup coffee machine with a
the coffee machine container and cloth and stainless steel cleaner.
switch on the machine.
Note:
The bottom of the tank, the opening on
the riser pipe and the diaphragm must be
free of coffee residues.

To remove the water level glass, re-


move the catch at the top. Clean the
water level glass using a pipe clean-
er or a bottle brush. After cleaning,
press the catch back into the water
level glass, ensuring leak-tightness.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 287


On-board kitchenette
Switching on the 2-carafe filter system

To clean the tap, unscrew the upper Switching on the 2-carafe filter
part with rocker arm and flush with system Note:
clean water. Galley switched on The coffee filter must equate to size 1
Flush the residual drain valve with Fresh water tank filled and connec- x 6 (commercially available). Add the
clean water. amount of coffee powder according to
ted
taste (e.g. 1 teaspoon per cup).

Caution: The 2-carafe filter system is able to


Running programs cannot be interrup- fill two carafes with a capacity of 2
ted. If there is a power failure, it will be litres. This is sufficient to pour 40
necessary to restart the program. If the 100 ml cups of coffee. It is possible
carafes contain coffee from a previous to brew 1/2 a carafe, 1 carafe or 2
program, they must be drained first to carafes of coffee.
avoid the risk of overflowing.

Caution:
To avoid the risk of overflowing, make
sure that the carafes are empty before
the brewing process begins.

288 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 cups of coffee)

Brewing 1/2 a carafe of coffee (10 Slide left-hand filter (25) back into Brewing 1 carafe of coffee (20 cups
cups of coffee) position. of coffee)
Place an empty carafe (26) under
left-hand filter (25).

M86_00-0151-01 M86_00-0151-01

Remove left-hand filter (25). Insert Remove left-hand filter (25). Insert
filter paper and add as much coffee M86_00-0153-01
filter paper and add as much coffee
powder as required. powder as required.
Press button (30) on the control pan-
el.
Note: Note:
The LED in button (30) lights up. The
Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea- Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea-
brewing process begins.
spoon per cup, which corresponds to 10 spoon per cup, which corresponds to
teaspoons for half a carafe of coffee). An electronic signal sounds when 20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee).
brewing has finished.
The LED in button (30) goes out.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 289


On-board kitchenette
Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 cups of coffee)

Slide left-hand filter (25) back into Brewing 2 carafes of coffee (40 Slide left-hand filter (25) and right-
position. cups of coffee) hand filter (27) back into position.
Place an empty carafe (26) under Place two empty carafes (26) and
left-hand filter (25). (28) under left-hand filter (25) and
right-hand filter (27) respectively.

M86_00-0152-01

Remove left-hand filter (25) and right-


M86_00-0154-01
hand filter (27). Insert filter paper
and add as much coffee powder as
Press button (31) on the control pan- M86_00-0155-01
required.
el. Press button (32) on the control pan-
el.
The LED in button (31) lights up. The Note:
brewing process begins. The LED in button (32) lights up. The
Add coffee powder to taste (e.g. 1 tea-
brewing process begins.
An electronic signal sounds when spoon per cup, which corresponds to
brewing has finished. 20 teaspoons for one carafe of coffee).

The LED in button (31) goes out.

290 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Manual operation of the 2-carafe filter system

An electronic signal sounds when Manual operation of the 2-carafe


brewing has finished. filter system
The LED in button (32) goes out.
Note:
Button (33) is not required for normal
operation. It can be used to drain off
any residual water in the coffee machine
water tank.

M86_00-0156-01

Press button (33).


The water in the 2-carafe filter sys-
tem is boiled out.
The water in the 2-carafe filter sys-
tem is completely drained.

M86_00-0151-01

Place an empty carafe on the left-


hand side.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 291


On-board kitchenette
Descaling the coffee machine

Descaling the coffee machine Hold hose in a container of descaler


(at least 10 litres).
Note:
Note:
How frequently the galley should be de-
scaled depends on the water quality but Use only descalers that are suitable for
the coffee machine should be descaled domestic appliances. The descaler must
immediately if performance deteriorates not attack plastics and aluminium.
or if the openings in the filter begin to
scale up. Operate the 40-cup coffee machine
without the filter holder and with the
tank full or operate the 2-carafe filter
system with two carafes.

Note:
Clean the filter holder of the 40-cup cof-
fee machine using only a commercially
available washing up liquid and a brush.
M86_00-0142-02
Connect the hose to fresh water tank
Disconnect the hose at quick-release (4).
coupling (5).

292 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Winter operation

Flush with fresh water. To do this, Winter operation Draining the fresh water tank
brew several carafes without coffee. Galley switched on
Over winter, drain the fresh water
Note: tank, water lines, boiler, coffee ma-
Repeat the last step until the water no chines and siphon.
longer tastes or smells of descaler or vin-
egar.
Note:
To prevent damage to water-carrying in-
stallations, these must be completely
drained before the first frost.

M86_00-0142-02

Disconnect quick-release coupling (5)


from fresh water tank (4).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 293


On-board kitchenette
Draining the water lines

Release both tensioning straps (4.4). Draining the water lines


Remove fresh water tank (4) from the
bus and open cap (4.1) to completely
drain the water.

Note:
Use spanner (4.3) if the caps are difficult
to turn.

Close cap (4.1) firm and tight. Fit


fresh water tank (4) into the bus and M86_00-0377-71
secure using tensioning straps (4.4).
M86_00-0305-71 To drain off the remaining water,
Connect quick-release coupling (5) to
To drain off the majority of the water, open cold water tap (5) and hot wa-
fresh water tank (4).
route hose (2) to the outside of the ter tap (6) and allow the boiler to
The fresh water tank is completely drain empty.
bus and open tap (1).
drained.
The water lines are completely
Note: drained.
The tap is located in the luggage com-
partment next to the fresh water tank or
below the water pump.

294 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Draining the boiler

Draining the boiler Open hose clamp (36.2), remove red


or black drain plug (36.1) and drain
all the water from the boiler into the
Caution:
container underneath.
There is a risk of overheating if the boiler
is operated with no water. Switch off the Seal hose (36) with the red or black
boiler before draining it. drain plug (36.1). Secure drain
plug (36.1) firmly in place using hose
clamp (36.2). Slide hose (36) back
Note: into the galley.
The drain plug is located on the bottom The boiler is completely drained.
left behind the folding cover of the galley. M86_00-0306-71

Pull out hose (36) on the left-hand


side behind the folding cover.
Position a heat-resistant container
(minimum capacity of 5 litres) under
the end of the hose sealed with a red
or black drain plug (36.1).

Danger.
Hot water may flow out when the boiler is
drained. Do not allow your hands or arms
to come into contact with the water.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 295


On-board kitchenette
Draining the 40-cup coffee machine

Draining the 40-cup coffee machine Turn residual drain valve (24) to the Draining the 2-carafe filter system
open position to drain the residual
water from the 40-cup coffee ma-
Note:
chine.
The 2-carafe filter system is automatically
The residual water drains out. drained after every brewing process.
Turn residual drain valve (24) back to
the closed position. Proceed as follows if you wish to
make sure that there is no more wa-
The 40-cup coffee machine is com- ter in the 2-carafe filter system:
pletely drained and sealed.

M86_00-0159-02

Position residual drain valve (37) over


M86_00-0151-01
drainage basin (38).
Place an empty carafe (26) on the
left-hand side.

296 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Draining the siphon

Draining the siphon Fill the siphon with windscreen anti-


freeze mat. no. A 001 986 45 71 11
(down to -30 °C) and then reas-
Note:
semble it.
The siphon of the galley waste water
drain is located in the 2nd step in door-
way II.

M86_00-0156-01

Press button (33).


The water in the coffee machine tank
is boiled out.
The 2-carafe filter system is drained.

M86_00-0160-01

Disassemble and empty the siphon


(39) (odour trap) for the kitchenette
waste water drain at union nuts
(39.1).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 297


On-board kitchenette
Replacing fuses

Replacing fuses
Note:
Danger. Risk of fire. This description is based on the stand-
ard assignment of fuses in the bus. Bus-
Do not use fuses with a higher than spe- specific assignment may differ from bus
cified amperage. to bus. Not all fuse slots are necessar-
The result would be damage to the elec- ily occupied in every bus. Furthermore,
trical system or even a fire in the cables. fuses may occupy unassigned slots be-
Always use fuses of the specified am- cause they are protecting special custom-
perage and never attempt to bridge or er options or retrofitted equipment, for
rewire fuses. example.
Fuses should be replaced only when M86_00-0001-01
the cause of malfunction has been Switch off the kitchenette at master
rectified.
switch (1).
The LED goes out.
Danger. Switch off the engine.
Do not replace fuses unless the power
has been switched off.

298 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Replacing fuses

Remove the control panel by loosen-


ing the four crosshead screws under
the film.

Note:
In the case of on-board kitchenettes with
2-carafe filter system.

M54.00-2004-71 M86_00-0377-71

Switch battery isolating switch One fuse (4) is integrated into the
(01S01) to OFF. control panel. Additional fuses (4)
are located behind the drawers.
Danger.
Use only fuses of the specified amper- Note:
age. Never replace fuses with those of a In the case of on-board kitchenettes with
higher ampere rating as this could lead to 40-cup coffee machine.
M86_00-0162-01
damage to the electrical system.
Exchange the defective fuse.
Move the control panel into position
and secure using the four crosshead
screws.
The kitchenette can be switched on.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 299


On-board kitchenette
Malfunctions

Malfunctions Restoring boiler operation following The overheating protection is


This section describes malfunctions a malfunction triggered if the boiler is operated
that you can rectify yourself. with no water.

Note:
Fill the boiler with water to rectify the
malfunction. Reactivate the overheating
protection by pressing button (11) behind
the control panel.

M86_00-0148-02

300 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Using the sausage heater again after a malfunction

Insufficient hot water flow or excess- Using the sausage heater again
ive heating time. after a malfunction

Note:
Symptom of scaling, descale the boiler.

Water flows out of the tap when the


boiler is heating.

Note:
M86_00-0162-01 No malfunction, because water expands
during the heating process.
The boiler does not heat up.
M86_00-0165-01
Note: The overheating protection is
Replace fuse (44) to rectify the malfunc- triggered if the sausage heater is
tion. operated with no water. The red LED
in button (13.4) lights up.

Note:
Fill the sausage heater with water to
rectify the malfunction. Reactivate the
overheating protection by pressing button
(13.4) on the control panel.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 301


On-board kitchenette
Using the 40-cup coffee machine again after a malfunction

Using the 40-cup coffee machine The brewing process for 40 cups still
again after a malfunction has not finished after approximately
Heating is switched off by a temper- 40 minutes.
ature limiter if the coffee machine
overheats. Note:
The riser pipe is not seated in the centre
Note: of the brewing chamber. Riser pipe or
diaphragm blocked.
Pressing in the red pin at the base of the
appliance reactivates the coffee machine Coffee machine boils over.
(after approximately 5 - 10 minutes cool-
ing down period) M86_00-0377-71
Note:
The indicator lamp does not light up.
Too much water added. Coffee powder
too fine. Filter holder clogged or blocked.
Note: Lid not locked.
Check the power supply or replace fuse
Dripping tap.
(4) if necessary.

Note:
Dirt, e.g. coffee residue, clean the tap.
Screw connection leaking, replace the
seal.

302 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Using the 2-carafe filter system again after a malfunction

No water level in the water level Using the 2-carafe filter system
glass even though the coffee ma- again after a malfunction
chine is full. A continuous tone indicates that the
fresh water tank is empty.
Note:
Lower inlet opening blocked. Clean the Note:
inlet opening from the inside, remove the
Fill the fresh water tank. Press any but-
water level glass if necessary.
ton on the control panel of the 2-carafe
Water dripping from residual drain filter system. The 2-carafe filter system
resumes the program from the point at
valve.
which it was interrupted.
M86_00-0157-01

Note: Overheating protection triggered.


Dirt, e.g. coffee residue, unscrew the
angle piece and clean the tap. Screw Note:
connection leaking, replace the seal. To reactivate the 2-carafe filter system,
press the overheat protection switch for
left-hand carafe (34) or right-hand carafe
(35) behind the control panel.

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 303


On-board kitchenette
Other malfunctions

Other malfunctions
Note:
Change bulb (24 V/5 W) or replace fuse
(42).

Note:
In the case of on-board kitchenettes with
40-cup coffee machine, the lighting fea-
tures LED technology.

M86_00-0162-01

2-carafe filter system fills with water M86_00-0162-01


but does not brew. The control panel is not working.

Note: Note:
Replace fuse (43) to rectify the malfunc- Either the fuse or the control panel is
tion. defective. Replace fuse (42) or have the
control panel repaired by the after-sales
service.

Galley light does not switch on.

304 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette
Switching off the galley

Switching off the galley

Note:
All appliances must be switched off be-
fore the galley can be switched off.

M86_00-0377-71

No water or irregular flow.

Note:
Fill the fresh water tank with water. Or
replace fuse (41). Or have the water
pump replaced by the after-sales service.

Note:
In the case of on-board kitchenettes with
40-cup coffee machine, replace defective
M86_00-0375-73
fuse (4).

TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB 305


On-board kitchenette
Switching off the galley

Switch off the galley lighting using


button (2) on the control panel.

M86_00-0001-01

Press galley master switch (1).


M86_00-0141-01 The LED goes out.
In the case of on-board kitchenettes
The galley is switched off.
with 2-carafe filter system, switch off
the galley lighting using button (3) on
the control panel.
Fold the upper folding cover upwards
through 90° and press against the
guide rails. Pull the entire folding
cover upwards by the upper folding
cover.
The galley is locked away.

306 TOURISMO / M / L (Euro VI)/10.2014 GB


On-board kitchenette (Eltesan)
Table of contents

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308


Use for the intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Approved personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Switching on the on-board k